JP2019058432A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing a control load relating to a performance display device.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: game state control means capable of controlling a game state to any of a plurality of types of game states on the basis of a game control program in an in-area ROM; and information display control means for controlling for the information display means on the basis of an information display control program in an out-of-area ROM, wherein a storage area is provided which is capable of storing specific data indicating it is in a normal state in the out-of-area RAM while a storage area is provided which is capable of storing game state data for specifying the current game state in the in-area RAM. The information display control means determines whether or not a state is the normal state on the basis of the game state data of the in-area RAM, and stores the specific data in a predetermined area of the out-of-area RAM when the state is the normal state. On the basis of the stored specific data, specific information on the game result is calculated, and performance information is displayed on a performance display device.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 28

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Generally, in a gaming machine, for example, a ball and ball gaming machine, a hit is made when the game ball enters the starting opening, and a lottery is executed, and if the lottery is won, a winning game etc. which is advantageous to the player It is supposed to generate a profit condition. Conventionally, illegal nail adjustment has been performed in many pachinko halls for this type of game machine, and it has been the case that the player's irritability is felt. On the other hand, manufacturers have developed game machines with measures to prevent nail adjustment (see, for example, Patent Document 1), but it can not be said that sufficient results have been achieved. It has become a stream of trying to prohibit nail adjustment etc. which has been accredited thoroughly. Therefore, it is necessary to inspect whether the ball out performance etc. of the gaming machine is not deviated from the original performance by nail adjustment or the like.

JP, 2017-144042, A

  Therefore, it is necessary to provide the gaming machine with a performance display device that displays information (for example, a base value and the like) related to the performance based on the game result so that the ball performance and the like can be easily grasped. However, since the program capacity of the gaming machine and the control relating to the gaming are strictly restricted legally, when the above-mentioned performance display device is provided, the burden of controlling the gaming machine is reduced without complicating the gaming process. This is very important.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load of the gaming machine when the above-described performance display device is provided.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. Although the corresponding elements in the embodiments are shown in parentheses, the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) A first RAM area (in-area RAM) capable of storing gaming data used in gaming processing relating to gaming progression and information display data usable in information display processing not directly related to the gaming progression A RAM (RAM 203) including a 2 RAM area (an out-of-area RAM);
A first ROM area (in-area ROM) for storing a game control program for executing the game process, and a second ROM area (out-of-area ROM) for storing an information display control program for executing the information display process Containing ROM (ROM 202),
A game control unit (main control unit 20) configured to have a CPU that executes a game control operation based on the game control program and the information display control program;
Information display means (performance indicator 99) capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game result;
A gaming machine capable of executing and controlling a plurality of types of gaming states (normal state, latent state, time saving state, probability changing state, etc.)
The game control means
Gaming state control means (S416 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 18) that can be controlled to any of the plurality of types of gaming states based on the gaming control program;
Information display control means (S040 in FIG. 8, FIG. 28 etc.) for performing control related to the information display means based on the information display control program;
While the first RAM area is provided with a gaming information storage area capable of storing gaming state data (gaming state number YJ) for specifying the current gaming state as the gaming data,
The second RAM area is provided with a specific information storage area capable of storing specific data indicative of a specific gaming state (S829 in FIG. 28).
The information display control means
Determining means (S828 in FIG. 28) for determining whether or not the current gaming state is a specific gaming state based on the gaming state data stored in the gaming information storage area;
Specific information storage means (S 829 in FIG. 28) for storing the specific data in the specific information storage area when it is determined by the determination means that the game state is the specific one;
Calculation means (S040 in FIG. 8B, S830 in FIG. 28) for calculating specific information (base value) related to the game result based on the specific data;
Display control means (S825, S831 in FIG. 28) for controlling display of the information to be displayed on the information display means based on the specific information calculated by the calculation means.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the present invention, the control load on the performance display device can be reduced.

FIG. 1 is a front view showing an appearance of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game board of the game machine, and an effect button. It is a block diagram showing the control device of the game machine. FIG. 12 is a diagram for describing the game state transition of the gaming machine. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram of assistance in explaining screen display of a liquid crystal display device according to the gaming machine. FIG. 21 is an explanatory view to be used for explaining transition of a gaming state according to the same gaming machine. It is an explanatory view which is provided for explanation of stop relation of special symbols 1 and 2 in simultaneous variation type concerning the same gaming machine, and front and back relation of display effect of the special symbol. It is a flow chart which shows the first half of the main control side main processing concerning the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the second half of the main control side main processing concerning the game machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the input information of the setting key switch which concerns on the game machine, a RAM clear switch, a door open switch, and the value of W register, and the correspondence of input information and transfer processing. It is a flowchart which shows the operation confirmation timer setting process in FIG. 8B. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process in FIG. 8A. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st power supply abnormality check process (A) in FIG. 8A, and the 2nd power supply abnormality check process (B) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process in FIG. 8A. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process in FIG. 8B. It is a flow chart which shows the main control side timer interruption processing concerning the game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management processing 1 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process 2 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the starting opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state information transmission process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol variation in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol 1 change in Drawing 23. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol 2 change in Drawing 23. It is a flowchart which shows the first half of a process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the second half of a process during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing setting abnormality check processing in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18; It is a flowchart which shows the performance display monitor process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the test injection test signal terminal management process in FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing out-of-area RAM clear check processing in FIG. 28. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the operation confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display data update process in FIG. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram used for describing effects in a normal state and a big hit game pertaining to the same gaming machine. It is an explanatory view provided to explain an effect during a big hit game concerning the same gaming machine. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view which serves to explain an effect at the end of a big hit game and a small hit game according to the same gaming machine. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram used for describing effects in the latent state and the big hit game pertaining to the same gaming machine. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view which serves to explain an effect at the end of a big hit game and during a normal state relating to the same gaming machine. It is an explanatory view provided to explain an effect during a big hit game concerning the same gaming machine. FIG. 21 is an explanatory view of assistance in explaining an effect in a normal state relating to the gaming machine. It is a time chart of the outside end output signal concerning the same gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table which concerns on the game machine. It is a figure showing the big hit fluctuation pattern distribution table concerning the game machine. It is a figure which shows the loss change pattern distribution table for special figures 1 concerning the game machine. It is a figure showing loss / small hitting fluctuation pattern distribution table for special figure 2 concerning the game machine. It is a figure which shows identification display part LED data table (a) and decimal value LED data table (b) which concern on the game machine. FIG. 21 is an explanatory view which serves to explain a display state of a performance indicator during various game periods related to the same gaming machine.

  The preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of configuration: FIG. 1 and FIG. 2>
An outline of a configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front of the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter referred to as “game machine 1”) has a frame-like front frame 2 attached to the front of a wooden outer frame 4 in an openable / closable manner. The game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is made to face the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are disposed.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. By inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 By operating on the other side, the lock state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened on the front side.

  Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 pivotally supported by the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed. An upper saucer unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and an upper saucer 9 for storing the ejected game balls is formed in the upper saucer unit 8.

  In the upper tray unit 8, a ball removing button 14 for pulling out the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 9 to the lower side of the gaming machine 1, and payout of the gaming balls to the gaming ball lending device (not shown) A ball lending button 11 for making a request, and a card return button 12 for making a request for returning the value medium inserted into the gaming ball lending device are provided.

  Further, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with an effect button 13 (first operation means) and a direction key 75 (second operation means) configured to be operable by the player. The former effect button 13 mainly operates when the built-in lamp is turned on during a predetermined input acceptance period (monitoring period of the effect button) so that it can be operated (input acceptance is possible), and the built-in lamp (button LED 13b) is lit (input When a predetermined operation (press, continuous hit, long press, etc.) is made during the reception period, it is possible to bring about a change in a specific effect. The latter direction key 75 is in the form of a cross key as shown in FIG. 2, and includes an upper button 75a, a right button 75b, a lower button 75c, and a left button 75d as up, down, left and right direction instruction buttons. By operating these direction instruction buttons, it is possible to make the setting screen related to the game appear and to change and set the volume setting, the light amount setting, the effect mode setting and the like.

  Further, on the right end side of the front operation panel 7, a launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided.

  In addition, on both sides of the upper portion of the front frame 2 and above the launch operation handle 15, speakers 46 are provided which exhibit a sound effect (sound effect) by sound. In addition, a plurality of decoration lamps 45 (full-color LEDs: LEDs for light effect), which exhibit a light effect by light decoration, are provided at appropriate positions of the glass door 6. A plurality of full color LEDs (light effect LED) as the decoration lamps 45 are provided circumferentially around the pachinko gaming machine, that is, around the front frame of the glass door 6, and in the present specification, "surrounding LED 45" It is called.

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. On the game board 3, as shown in the figure, a ball guiding rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted as a board division member, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guiding rail 5 is The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

  A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 3a. The liquid crystal display device 36 is independently controlled by a plurality of numbers, characters, symbols, etc. in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variation display areas) under the control of the effect control unit 24 described later. Various kinds of display including variation display operation (variation display and stop display) of kinds of decorative symbols (for example, left symbol (corresponding to left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to middle display area), right symbol (corresponding to right display area)) Display the effect by an image.

  Further, in the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 (flow path distribution means) is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant winding manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and fixed to the game board 3 with a front mounting plate 48 a And a weir frame portion 48b which forms the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 36 and which surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. A floating area through which game balls can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guiding rail 5, and the game balls are also guided to the right side of the center decoration 48. The game balls thrown into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launch device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the hail frame 48b depending on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls, and the left side of the center ornament 48. It flows down either of the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c on the right side.

  The non-playing area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is provided with a middle start opening 34 and a right start opening 33 (first special symbol) And a special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) configured to be arranged side by side corresponding to the lower right start opening 35 (for the second special symbol) and a special symbol display device 38b (second Special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variation display game by the variation display operation of "special symbol" is executed. And in said liquid crystal display device 36, it synchronizes in time with the fluctuation display of the special symbol by this special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, displays the decoration symbol by the image, and displays it together with various notice effects (effect images) The decorative symbol variation display game is to be executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  Further, in the various function display sections, next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a composite display device (an LED display device for holding composite display) 38c comprising a 7-segment display (with dots) is disposed. The combination is called the special symbol 1 and 2, the display of the number of operation pending balls of the normal symbol, and the status notification of the fluctuation time shortening function in operation (time), and in the high probability state (high probability) This is because it is a hold / time-short / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having a display function.

  Further, in the various function display sections, a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged is provided adjacent to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, the normal symbol change display game is executed by the variable display operation of the normal symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as the variable display operation, the normal symbol by the LED repeats turning on and off alternately in a seesaw manner, and by stopping in a state where one side is turned on, the success or failure of the normal symbol changing display game becomes clear There is. In addition, a right-handed display device 39b with one LED is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. In this right-handed display device 39b, it is advantageous to aim at the game ball to pass through the right flow down path 3c by the combination of the lighting and non-lighting states of the LED, or the game ball is left flow down path 3b Informing you whether "left-handed", which aims to pass through, is advantageous. If the LED is on, it is informed that it is advantageous to hit the right.

  Under the center decoration 48, a middle starting opening 34 (first special symbol starting opening: first starting means) is provided, and inside thereof, a detection sensor 34a (middle starting opening for detecting passage of gaming balls) A sensor 34a: see FIG. 3) is formed. Below the middle starting opening 34, a plurality of general winning openings 43 are disposed at the lower left portion in the game board surface (in the case of the present embodiment, three on the left side) A general winning opening sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed to detect the passage of the mark.

  The middle starting opening 34, which is the first special symbol starting opening, is referred to as a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). 1) is a winning opening for the special symbol 1 according to the starting condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated as FIG. 1), and does not have a starting opening opening / closing means (means for opening or enlarging the starting opening) It is configured as a "winning device". In the case of the present embodiment, the left flow down path to the middle starting opening 34 by the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, the game nail (not shown), the windmill 44, the center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a. The game ball that has flowed down 3b has a configuration that is easy to enter (winning), while the game ball that has flowed down the right flow down path 3c has a configuration that is difficult to enter or unable to enter. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, as with the middle starting opening 34, a right starting opening 33 for the special symbol 1 described later is provided as a winning opening relating to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the special symbol 1.

  Further, on the upper side of the middle part of the downstream flow path 3c, a combination gate 57 (specific passing area) formed of a passing gate through which game balls can pass is provided. The role gate 57 is a passage area for executing a round game when a big hit is made, and a gate gate 57a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is formed in the passage region. .

  As in the case of the service gate 57, a normal symbol start port 37 (third start means) consisting of a passing gate is provided below the service gate 57. The normal symbol starting port 37 is a winning opening related to the variable display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) which detects gaming balls passing therethrough. Is formed.

  In the lower part of the normal symbol starting opening 37, the special fluctuation winning device 42 for the big hit (the first special electric combination: the first winning means), the ordinary fluctuation winning device 41 which functions as a so-called electric tulip, the small hit Lower special start winning device 52 for the second (second special electric combination: second big winning means), the lower right starting opening 35 for the special symbol 2 to be described later, to be located sequentially downward in this order It is provided. These five parties are arranged as a whole in a substantially zigzag shape, and the normal symbol starting opening 37 is located on the right of the game board most, then the normal changing winning device 41, the upper special changing winning device 42, the lower right starting opening 35, The lower special variation winning device 52 is displaced inward in the order.

  The normal fluctuation winning device 41 is configured as a winning ratio changing type winning device capable of changing the winning percentage of the game ball of the starting opening by the starting opening opening / closing means. In the case of this embodiment, the right starting opening 33 (first special symbol starting opening: second starting means) having a horizontally long opening for two or more game balls and a lid covering the right starting opening 33 exist. It has a movable piece 47 which can be sunk from the game board surface, and when the movable piece 47 is in an advancing state in which it protrudes from the game board surface, the right start opening 33 is closed (closed state), and the game board is in a retracted state. When the right start port 33 is opened (opened). When the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is in the non-operating state (normal state), the movable piece 47 is in the protruding state and the right start port 33 is closed (a winning difficulty or a winning impossible state), but the normal fluctuation winning device When 41 is in the operating state, the movable piece 47 is retracted and left from above the right start port 33, and the right start port 33 is opened (the winning state). As a result, the horizontally long opening of the right start opening 33 appears, and the game balls are changed to a large number. Inside the right start opening 33, a detection sensor 33a (right start opening sensor 33a: see FIG. 3) for detecting passage of the game ball is provided, and the game ball picked up by this is detected.

  The right start opening 33 provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is, like the middle start opening 34, a winning according to the start condition of the variable display operation of the special symbol 1 in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) It is a mouth, and in this embodiment, when the movable piece 47 is inoperative, the closed state (impossible state) is maintained in which it is impossible to win the right starting hole 33.

  The above-mentioned operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 works the same as a so-called "electric tulip type winning device (abbreviated as electric chew)" having a pair of movable wing pieces (movable members) on the left and right on the starting opening. . Therefore, in the present specification, the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is sometimes abbreviated as "electric chew". The configuration of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, a winning rate fixed type winning device such as middle starting opening 34 (first starting opening), and a winning rate varying type winning device (second starting opening) in which the winning area is expanded or opened by the starting opening opening / closing means The present invention may be configured as a general electric tulip-type winning device provided above and below. In this case, even if the first right start port is configured as a special figure 2 (or special figure 1), and the second right start port is a prize port according to the start condition of the variable display operation of special figure 1 (or special figure 2). Alternatively, both may be configured as a winning opening related to the start condition of the variable display operation of the special view 2 (or special view 1). In addition, a movable piece having a width corresponding to one game ball may be made to project and sink from the game board, and the movable piece may be configured to pick up the game ball and guide it to a guiding rod on the back of the game board.

  In addition, the lower right start opening 35 on the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). It is a winning opening for the special symbol 2 according to the starting condition of the variable display operation of “special figure 2”), and in this embodiment, it is not the electric chew, but the same “winning ratio fixed winning type” as the middle starting opening 34. It is configured as a device.

  In the middle of the flow-down path from the normal symbol starting opening 37 to the normal fluctuation winning device 41 (electric chute) in the right flowing flow path 3c, a special hit for high hit is provided for the big hit. The special variation winning device 42 has an upper large winning opening 40 and a projecting open door 42b covering it, and can open and close the upper winning opening 40 by the open door 42b projecting into the game board surface. In the inside of the large winning opening 40, a large winning opening sensor 42a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the entered gaming ball is formed. The top of the open door 42b of the special swing winning device 42 for this big hit is inclined downward to the right, and the gaming ball on the open door 42b is guided down to the normal swing winning device 41 (electric chew) side It is supposed to be.

  A horizontally-long flow path correction plate 37d inclined downward to the left is provided above the upper special variation winning device 42 so as to cross the area of the right flow down path 3c between the symbol start port 37 and the normal pattern start port 37. There is. The flow path correction plate 37d receives the gaming ball flowing down the right downward flow path 3c and works to move the gaming ball in the direction of the upper special fluctuation winning device 42 (left direction in FIG. 2). The lower left end of the flow path correction plate 37 d is above the upper special fluctuation winning device 42. Therefore, all the game balls are picked up by the flow path correction plate 37d and guided to the upper special fluctuation winning device 42.

  In addition, below the upper special fluctuation winning device 42, a horizontally long downward flow guide plate 40d inclined downward to the left is provided between the special fluctuation winning device 41 and the upper special fluctuation winning device 42. The flow guide plate 40d is located near the lower end of the open door 42b of the upper special fluctuation winning device 42 at the upper right end, and is a game ball which has flowed down from the open door 42b and has its direction changed by a guide nail immediately below. , Pick up a portion of it, it works to flow down on the special fluctuation winning combination device 52 below.

  The small hitting lower special winning combination device 52 is configured to be able to open or enlarge the lower large winning opening 50 by the lower large winning opening 50 and the slick type open door 52 b covering the lower large winning opening 50. In the inside thereof, a lower large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) is formed which detects the gaming ball having entered the lower large winning opening 50.

  The ball entry process to the big prize winning opening 40 at the time of big hit is as follows. The game ball having passed through the floating area between the top surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guiding rail 5 flows down the right flow down path 3c. The game balls are all picked up by the flow path correction plate 37d and guided onto the special fluctuation winning device 42. In the case of a big hit, the upper prize winning opening 40 is opened. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, almost all of the game balls are won from the flow path correction plate 37d to the upper large winning opening 40.

  In addition, the ball entry process to lower large winning a prize opening 50 when small hitting becomes like below. The game ball flows down the right flow path 3c. The game balls are guided in the direction of the upper special fluctuation winning device 42 by the flow path correction plate 51 d. The game ball rolls on the open door 42b closing the upper large winning opening 40 and flows down from the lower right end. Most of the game balls are guided in the direction of the normal variable winning device 41 by a predetermined sequence of game balls not shown, and a portion of the game balls is guided to the lower large winning opening 50 side on the flow guide plate 40d. The opening time of the right starting opening 33 by the movable piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is 3.7 seconds (three opening 1.2 seconds + two opening 0.5 seconds) in the positive and negative states , 0.1 seconds in the normal state and the latent state. Therefore, the number of gaming balls guided to the lower large winning opening 50 side without being picked up during the opening period of the right start opening 33 is increased.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among various winning openings provided in the gaming area 3a, when there is a winning to a winning opening other than the normal symbol starting opening 37, a promise is made separately for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, four in the middle starting opening 34, one in the right starting opening 33, two in the lower right starting opening 35, the upper large winning opening 40 (big winning opening for big hit) 15 pieces, 10 lower prize winning openings 50 (small winning prize winning openings) 10, 6 general winning openings 43, 0 normal symbol opening 37 (no prize balls) are the game ball payout devices 19 (see FIG. 3) will be paid out. The game balls that did not win in each of the above-described winning openings are discharged from the game area 3 a through the out port 49. Here, "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the gaming ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the gaming ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing type gate (for example, the normal symbol starting opening 37 In the case of), it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and in fact, when the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, “winning” in the winning opening Is treated as having occurred. The game ball pertaining to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball". It should be noted that if the game ball enters the winning opening, the game ball is detected by the prize detection switch, so unless otherwise noted in the present specification, whether the game ball was detected in the prize detection switch Regardless of whether or not there is a case where the game ball enters the winning opening, it may be referred to as "winning".

  Further, in the area of the game board, a plurality of movable body effects are disposed at positions which do not interfere with the flow of the game balls. In this example, the first movable body character (clock-like character) 80 is disposed at the upper right side in the center decoration 48, that is, at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the gaming ball passing through the right flow downward path 3c. A second movable body part (flower type part) 90 is disposed on the side. In these, the movable body role functions as a rendering means, and by its operation mode, a movable body rendering such as suggesting a winning expectation to win a hit is realized.

<2. Controller: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as a "main control unit 20") that centrally controls control (game operation control) related to the entire game operation. An effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "effect control portion 24") which comprehensively manages execution control (effect control) of effect by the effect means upon receipt of an effect control command from the main control portion 20. And a payout control board (payout control means) 29 for controlling the payout of the winning balls, and a necessary power source (including a backup power source) for each board of the gaming machine from an external power source (not shown). A power supply substrate (power supply control means (not shown)) is mainly formed. Further, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 has a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure, a ROM 202 (main control for storing various data necessary for game operation control) A ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) functioning as a work area and a buffer memory are mounted to constitute a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent) as a whole.

  Also, although not shown, the main control unit 20 provides an interrupt signal to the CPU, CTC that gives the Z80 system a function to generate pulse output (bit rate generator) for periodic interrupt, constant period, and time measurement. Interrupt controller circuit that exhibits interrupt enable / interrupt disable function such as timer interrupt, Reset circuit that can reset CPU by detecting system power on / off or power supply abnormality detection, control program, control program A watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors abnormal operation, a designated area out-of-specification inhibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether a program is correctly executed within a preset address range, a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers. Note that at least the main control unit (delivery control board) 20 and the delivery control board 29 start execution of necessary backup processing prior to power shut down by receiving a voltage drop signal received from the power board, and before power shut down. The game operation of can be resumed after the power is turned on (backup function). In this gaming machine 1, the stored contents of each RAM can be held for at least several days.

  The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as the internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , Use the random value for the big hit lottery. Note that the internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number value generated by an appropriate software process and a hard random number value in order to prevent a goto act such as hitting and hitting.

  The main control unit 20 includes a middle starting opening sensor 34a that detects winnings in the middle starting opening 34, a right starting opening sensor 33a that detects winnings in the right starting opening 33, and winnings in the lower right starting opening 35. Lower right start opening sensor 35a to detect, normal symbol start opening sensor 37a to detect passage of gaming balls to normal symbol start opening 37, and upper large winning opening sensor 42a to detect winning on upper large winning opening 40, It is discharged from the gaming machine through the lower large winning opening sensor 52a which detects the winning to the lower large winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a which detects the winning to the general winning opening 43, the out opening 49 and each winning opening An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting game balls (so-called out balls) is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. The main control unit 20 grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (enters) based on the detection signal from each sensor.

  Further, the main control unit 20 includes a combination gate sensor 57a for detecting passage of gaming balls to the combination gate 52, a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 203, and a pachinko gaming machine (not shown). A fraud detection sensor (a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor or the like) for detecting a fraudulent act on the machine 1 is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. The fraud detection sensor is installed at an appropriate position for detecting fraud.

  The main control unit 20 also includes an ordinary electric combination solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 47 of the right start opening 33 and an upper winning opening solenoid for controlling the opening door 42b of the upper large winning opening 40. 42c and a lower large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening door 52b of the lower large winning opening 50 are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling these.

  In addition, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbols 1 and 2 . Further, the main control unit 20 is connected with the normal symbol display device 39a, and can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the normal symbol.

  Further, a compound display 38c and a number-of-rounds display device (not shown) are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling display of various information displayed thereon It has become. Further, to the main control unit 20, a right-handed display device 39b is connected, and the main control unit 20 is advantageous in that "right-handed" which aims to aim the gaming ball to pass through the right flowing path 3c is advantageous It is possible to transmit a control signal for notifying whether "left-handed" which aims at passing through the left flow down path 3b is advantageous.

  Further, the frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 receives predetermined game information from the frame external terminal board 21 (for example, winning game start information, winning information for the starting opening) It is possible to output a signal (outer end signal) including (such as special symbol fluctuation start information), prize ball number information, specific error information (vibration sensor error, radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error etc) etc. to the outside of the gaming machine It has become. The frame external terminal board 21 is configured to be connectable to the data counter DT provided outside the gaming machine and the hall computer HC, and the signal (outer end signal) output from the frame external terminal board 21 is The data is sent to the data counter DT and the hall computer HC.

  The frame external terminal board 21 is provided with a plurality of channels for external output. The connector corresponding to each channel and the connector on the data counter DT side are connected by a cable. Then, one signal is output to the outside from each connector (information terminal). The external end signals output to the outside of the gaming machine through the information terminals of the frame external terminal board 21 include, for example, the following signals (1) to (10).

(1) "Special symbol determination signal (information terminal 1)" output when the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is stopped,
(2) The "time change big hit medium signal (information terminal 2)", which is output during the big hit game when the special symbol time short function described later is in operation,
(3) "Variation reduction signal (information terminal 3)" which is output when the special symbol time reduction function is in operation,
(4) "starting opening signal (information terminal 4)" which is output when the starting opening sensors 33a, 34a, 35a detect the passage of the game ball,
(5) A "big hit, medium signal (information terminal 5)" which is output while the later-described accessory continuous operation device is in operation
(6) “Special symbol 1 confirmation signal (information terminal 6)” which is output when the fluctuation display of the special symbol 1 is stopped,
(7) "Special symbol 1 start port signal (information terminal 7)" output when the right start port sensor 33a or the middle start port sensor 34a detects a game ball,
(8) "Special symbol 2 start port signal (information terminal 8)" output when the lower right start port sensor 35a detects a game ball
(9) When there is a winning on the winning opening, the number of winning balls is added, and 10 is subtracted from the total value every 10 or more, and the main value ball signal (information terminal 9 is output) ),
(10) When the RAM is cleared (output for 30000 ms from clearing the RAM), when setting change processing described later is executed (see Fig. 11), when incorrect magnetism detection by the magnetic sensor (output for 30000 ms after release from magnetism detection) "Security signal (information terminal 10) output when fraudulent radio wave is detected (output for 30000ms after cancellation from radio wave detection), when fraudulent prize detection is performed for normal start winning opening sensor 37a (output for 30000ms after 200ms continuous ON detection) And the like can be output.

  The main control unit 20 outputs the corresponding outer end signals from the information terminals 1 to 10 for a predetermined time (for example, for 100 ms) at the timing when the output trigger of each signal arrives, but the output signals are not continuous. Leave time (for example, 100 ms) and output.

  The hall computer HC monitors and collects gaming information of the gaming machine based on the outer end signal outputted from the frame external terminal board 21 and comprehensively manages the operation status etc. of the gaming machine installed in the pachinko hall Do.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 31A (3), the data counter DT related to the present invention will be described in detail. The data counter DT is a gaming information notification device for reporting specific gaming information on a connected gaming machine, and is usually installed at the top of the gaming machine. The data counter DT includes notification means for notifying predetermined game information based on the outer end signal from the frame external terminal board 21. The notification means is, for example, a light emitting unit DTa incorporating a full color LED, and display units DTb, DTc, DTd, DTe, etc. formed of a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

The illustrated data counter DT has the following notification function.
(A) "big hit notification function (light emitting part DTa)" to notify that effect when big hit occurs,
(B) "big hit cumulative number notification function (big hit number display part DTd)" which reports the total number of big hits (the number of big hits from the time of opening the store),
(C) “Acquired ball number notification function (not shown)” that reports the number of balls acquired during a big hit,
(D) "Start count notification function (start count display portion DTb) that reports the number of times the symbol variation display game has been executed (number of variations of the special symbol) since the end of the store opening or the big hit (which may be a specific big hit). ",
(E) “Start cumulative number of times notification function (total number of rotations display section DTc)” which reports the total number of changes of special symbols from the time of opening the store,
(F) “History information notification function (not shown)” that reports history information such as the number of times of big hit such as the previous day / the day before last (which may be the number of specific big hits) or the number of big hits.
(G) “Rental number reporting function (serial number display section DTe)” for reporting the number of consecutive homes (in this embodiment, the number of consecutive homes not including the first hit) caused by the current big hit.
Further, a symbol DTg is a call button for calling a hall clerk. When the call button DTg is pressed, the light emitting unit DTa emits light in a dedicated light emission mode during calling. Further, a code DTh is a push button for history information switching for displaying the history information.

  The data counter DT described above is currently installed for each game console in most pachinko halls. Such a data counter DT notifies, for example, that a big hit has occurred, upon receiving any of the above-mentioned "big hit signal" and "variable big hit medium signal" outputted during a big hit, or a big hit. Update the number of times etc. This not only informs the player of the occurrence of the big hit, but also informs surrounding players and hall clerks that the game console is a big hit, and can easily identify the occurrence of the big hit. .

  The data counter DT generally displays necessary information on various display units according to the outer end signal type based on the non-reception to reception reception of the outer end signal (ON edge).

  In addition, the main control unit 20 corresponds to a type test (a test relating to verification of a type of a gaming machine based on rules relating to accreditation of a gaming machine and a type verification of a type) conducted by the Japan Safety Electronic Communication Technology Association (BOU). Thus, it is possible to output from the frame external terminal board 21 a type test signal for specifying the game operation in real time. In addition, when installing a gaming machine that conforms to the type test in the pachinko hall, no change in the conformed control program is permitted. For this reason, even after being installed in the pachinko hall, the type test signal is repeatedly output processed (a test shot test signal terminal management process during the performance display monitor process described later (see step S823 in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 showing the details) ).

  Further, a payout control board (dispense control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when there is a need to pay out the winning balls, a control command relating to the payout to the payout control board 29 It is possible to transmit the specified payout control command).

  The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 for controlling the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for payout of game balls. The main roles of the payout control board 29 include reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the gaming ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, transmission of a status signal to the main control unit 20, etc. It is.

  The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply end detection sensor 19a for detecting a shortage of supply of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out, and the payout control board 29 Can be received. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out the game balls, and the payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. Can be transmitted.

  Further, the payout control board 29 is a full detection sensor 60 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting the storage state of gaming balls stored in the upper tray 9) for detecting the full state with the gaming balls. A door opening sensor 61 (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting the open state of the front frame 2 and / or the front operation panel 7) is connected.

  The payout control board 29 is capable of transmitting various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on detection signals from the fullness detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the shortage of replenishment detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. In this state signal, a ball clogging signal indicating a full state, a door open signal indicating that the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open, and a supply shortage indicating a supply shortage of gaming balls from the gaming ball payout device 19 It includes a signal, a counting error signal indicating that a payout ball has not been sufficiently dispensed, or that a malfunction has occurred in the ball counting sensor 19b, a payout completion signal indicating that the dispensing operation has been completed, etc., and various status signals can be transmitted. ing. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open (door open error), whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal or not (supply error), , Monitor the upper tray 9 full condition (ball clogging error) and the like.

  Further, a release control substrate 28 is connected to the payout control substrate 29 so that a release permission signal ES (a release control signal) for permitting release to the release control substrate 28 can be transmitted. The launch control board 28 controls the energization of a launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the fact that the launch permission signal ES from the delivery control board 29 is output, and the launch operation handle 15 The game ball firing operation is realized by the operation of. Specifically, it is detected that the launch permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29, and that the player is touching the steering wheel by a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of the gaming ball is permitted on condition that the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the launch permission signal ES is not output, the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the gaming ball is not launched. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the amount of operation of the firing operation handle 15. When the dispensing control board 29 detects the clogging error, the ball control signal is sent to the main control unit 20 and the output of the release permission signal ES to the emission control board 28 is stopped, so that the upper tray 9 is full. Control is performed to stop the striking operation until it is done.

  Further, a setting key switch 94, a setting change switch 95, and a setting change completion switch 96 are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. Further, a setting display 97 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of this.

  When the power is turned on, the setting key switch 94 inserts the setting key possessed by a person in charge of the hall and turns the setting key ON / OFF to change the setting value. It is a key switch for switching to "." The setting change switch 95 is a push button type switch for changing a setting value. The setting change completion switch 96 is a switch for setting determination used when determining the changed setting value. These switches are provided at appropriate places inside the gaming machine.

  The setting display unit 97 displays information on setting values and functions as a setting display unit. In the case of the present embodiment, one seven-segment display is configured and mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board, but the payout control board 28, the emission control board 29, the relay board (a relay board for relaying connection between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: Or an effect control unit (effect control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24 or the like can be provided at an appropriate place inside the gaming machine.

  The above-mentioned “set value” is to bring about a change in the ball out rate (so-called, machine split (PAYOUT rate)) in stages, and in the present embodiment, set values of 6 stages of settings 1 to 6 are provided ing. The “set value” defines at least a lottery probability (winning probability) of a big hit (a type of hit that a condition device to be described later operates) by stage (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6). The higher the setting value, the higher the winning probability is set, which is advantageous for the player. For example, the setting 1 is 1/410, the setting 2 is 1/390, the setting 3 1/370, the setting 4 1/350, the setting 5 1/330, and the setting 6 1/320. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the machine percentage, which acts more advantageously to the player. As described above, the set value is a value defining machine split and the like, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a specific event (for example, a big hit).

  By the way, the “set value” is determined based on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game arcade) exclusively by the hall clerk operating the setting change switch 95 to determine the target set value. When a plurality of jackpots are provided, it is possible to change the probability of winning all or part of the jackpot types serving as the operation trigger of the condition device according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of jackpots such as jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning all jackpots 1 to 4 or jackpots 1 to 3 that are specific jackpots The jackpot probability may be increased, and the jackpot probability may be set to a common winning probability with all set values (the jackpot probability for jackpots 1 to 4 may be increased). Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not become an operation trigger of the condition device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the above-mentioned big hit.

(About setting value change operation)
When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in the setting change operation enabled state, the current display value of the setting display 97 indicates “1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 →. * It is switched to circulate in the range of 1 to 6 like "." When the desired setting value is reached, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON, the current display value is decided as the setting value. The set value information is stored (stored) in a predetermined area (set value storage area) of the RAM 203. Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change operation enabled state ends. Therefore, main control unit 20 is a set value selection means for selecting any set value from among a plurality of set values based on the operation of predetermined operation means (set key switch 94, setting change switch 95). Function.

  Further, a performance indicator 99 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling display thereof.

(About the game result information displayed on the performance indicator 99)
The performance indicator 99 functions as information display means for displaying (notifying) information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") related to the game result for a predetermined period (specific game period), and a plurality of seven-segment displays (7 Segment LED). The performance display 99 of this embodiment arranges four 7-segment LEDs in which a display unit and a circuit unit are united side by side, and mounts them on the main control board 20, for example, to display four digits. Configure a possible indicator. Although the details will be described later, the above-mentioned "performance information" is information that the pachinko hall store and related agencies want to confirm, presence or absence of fraud prize balls such as excessive prize balls for gaming machines, and game balls inherent in gaming machines Information on performance and the like (predetermined information on game results) is a typical example. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player plays a game, unlike the notice effect and the like. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed at a place visible to the player, but installed at an easy-to-see place inside the gaming machine. Specifically, the main control unit (not to obscure the display unit of the performance indicator 99 composed of four 7-segment LEDs in a place easy to see from the back of the gaming machine, that is, hidden by a seal, a structure, etc.) Substrate case for protecting the control substrate or on a substrate such as main control substrate 20, delivery control substrate 28, emission control substrate 29, the above relay substrate, effect control unit (effect control substrate (including liquid crystal control substrate)) 24 or the like It is mounted on top. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side to display 4-digit numbers, and each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP below the 7-segment numbers.

Here, specifically, the following information can be adopted as the performance information.
(1) The total payout number paid out by a prize in the specific state (specific middle total number of prize balls: α) is divided by the total number of out balls in the specific state (specific number of out number: β) Information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α / β) can be adopted as performance information. Such specific ratio information is useful as an index for evaluating the out-dump performance of a gaming machine.
(1-1) The above "total paid out number" is when winning in the winning opening (inside starting opening 34, right starting opening 33, lower right starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, large winning opening 40, 50) It is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out. In the case of this embodiment, there are four middle start openings 34, one right start opening 33, two lower right start openings 35, 15 upper large winning openings 40, 10 lower large winning openings 50, etc. There are six winning openings 43. The total out ball number is the number of game balls (the number of game balls detected by the OUT monitoring switch 49 a) thrown from the launch device 32 into the game area 3 a.
(1-2) Further, which state is adopted as the “specific state” can be appropriately determined according to the performance information to be acquired. In the present embodiment, any state can be adopted among a normal state, a latent state, a short time state, a definite change state, a big hit game, a small hit game, etc. (Details of each game state will be described later. To do). Further, not only one state may be measured, but plural types of states may be measured. For example, a plurality of types of states can be appropriately selected as measurement targets, such as a normal state and a latent state, a normal state and a small hit game, and all game states except during a hit game.
(1-3) Also, as the period in the specific state, a period focusing on the big hit lottery probability may be taken as a measurement target, instead of focusing on each gaming state such as the normal state or the hit game. For example, the period of the jackpot lottery probability in the low probability state and / or the high probability state may be measured. It should be noted that the jackpot game by big hit (in big hit game) is controlled to the low probability state, and during the small hit game (small hit game), the game state at the time of winning continues, so the big hit lottery probability state at the winning It will be continued. Therefore, when it is desired to measure a period of a pure low probability state, a period excluding a big hit game may be taken as a measurement target. Further, when it is desired to measure the period of the low probability state or the high probability state excluding the big hit and the small hit both during the hit game, the period excluding the hit game may be measured. In addition, the details about the big hit type, the small hit type, the operation mode of these hit games, etc. will be described later.
(1-4) Also, as the "total payout number", one obtained by excluding one or a plurality of specific winning prize openings from the measurement target may be used as the total payout number (total winning number excluding specified prize winning openings). For example, among the winning openings, those obtained by excluding the large winning openings 40 and 50 from the measurement targets (in this case, the total number of payouts is obtained by excluding the hit from the measurement targets substantially). It is also good.

  (2) In addition, it is also possible to measure only one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding the specific winning combination opening, and the total number of out balls, and to use the measurement result as the performance information.

  In this embodiment, the total number of payouts in the normal state (the number of regular payouts) and the total number of out balls in the regular state (normal number of outs) are measured in real time, and the number of regular payouts is the normal number of outs The value obtained by dividing the value by 100 and multiplying by 100 (the number of paid out usually / the number of out usually multiplied by 100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as “base value”) Display the rounded value of the first place). Therefore, each data of the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the base value is stored (stored) in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (the normal payout number storage area, the normal out number storage area, the specific ratio information storage area). It is supposed to be However, rather than simply measuring permanently and displaying performance information, if the total number of out-of-spheres reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000), measurement is temporarily terminated, and The base value is stored as history information in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (the current base value is stored). In the case of the present embodiment, the “specified number” as the above-mentioned measurement end trigger is not the number of out during normal operation, but the total number of out balls during all gaming states (including during per game) ") Is adopted. The total number of out-of-states is also measured in real time, and is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (the total-state out number storage area). Hereinafter, unless otherwise required, the above-described (the normal dispensing number storage area, the normal out number storage area, the specific ratio information storage area, and the all state out number storage area) will be collectively referred to as a “measurement information storage area”.

  Then, after storing the current base value as history information, clear the measurement information storage area used in the current measurement, and select the next normal payout number, the normal out number, the base value, and the total out sphere number. Start measurement. By this, next performance information is measured and stored in real time.

  In the performance indicator 99, the previous base value as history information and the base value currently being measured in real time are alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals (simultaneous display is possible May). In the case of the present embodiment, among the four seven-segment LEDs, the two seven-segment LEDs in the front left half are the base values during measurement in real time (real-time base value: first base value) or the previous base value (Historical base value: 2nd base value) 'Identification display part (identification segment)' to display identification information that can identify whether it is 2 '7 segments LED of front right side half to display base value' The base display section (ratio seg) is'. When displaying the real-time base value on the base display unit, for example, “bL.” Is displayed on the identification display unit, and when displaying the history base value on the base display unit, the identification display unit Display “b6.” (Identification display). The base value is displayed on the numerical value display unit after rounding off the first decimal place, but if the value after rounding is three digits or more, “99.” indicating overflow is displayed on the base display unit. The history base value is not limited to the previous base value, but may be configured to be able to display a specific number of base values such as the last time before or the previous time (three times before), and the base value up to many times before It can be decided suitably about whether it displays. Further, with regard to the performance indicator 99, if it is a configuration capable of displaying at least the real-time base value and the previous history base value, what kind of display form the display of the base value will be. It is also free to use a periodic switching display mode or any other display mode.

  Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information related to the special symbol variation display game and information related to an error to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent the goto action, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24 and has a configuration of one-way communication in which the signal from the effect control unit 24 can not be received. .

(2-2. Effect control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 has a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) storing effect data required for effect control processing, and a RAM 243 (functioning as a work area or buffer memory It is composed mainly of a microcomputer equipped with a rendering control RAM), and in addition, an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), a counter circuit, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc. Control the overall rendering operation.

  The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are reception of effect control commands from the main control unit 20, determination of selection of effects based on effect control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36 which is effect means, sound of the speaker 46 Control, light emission control of the decoration lamp 45 and various LEDs (the button LED 13 b and other effect LED (not shown)), operation control of the movable object functions 80 and 90, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. The display control unit is a VDP that controls overall image output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, an image ROM storing image data (effect image data) on which VDP performs image expansion processing, and VDP is expanded. VRAM (Video RAM) for temporarily storing the image data, a liquid crystal control CPU for outputting control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, a program describing a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU, or the like A liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory are mainly configured.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 is an optical display including a decoration lamp 45 (peripheral LED 45) and various effect LEDs in order to make various effects (light effects, sound effects, movable object effects by movable object) appear. A light control unit for the device 45a, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, and a drive control unit (motor drive for the movable object product motor 80c for operating the movable object (not shown) Circuit) and the like. The effect control unit 24 can transmit a control signal related to the effect means to these control units.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the position detection sensor 82a for monitoring the movement of the movable object, and the effect control unit 24 operates the current operation of the movable object based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the home position). Further, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, it monitors a malfunction of the operation of the movable body, and if a malfunction occurs, this is reported as an error.

  In addition, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and a direction key switch (not shown) for detecting the operation of the direction key 75 (75a to 75d). The unit 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect button 13 and the direction key 75.

  Based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 randomly determines from among a plurality of effect patterns prepared in advance by lottery, and determines various effect means at necessary timing. Control to bring out the desired effect. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, the lighting and blinking drive of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative symbol variation display operation and The “rendering scenario” in a broad sense is realized by the advance presentation and the like being expanded in time series.

  In addition, the effect control command defines a function by a 1-byte long mode (MODE) and a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte long event (EVENT) as well, and in order to distinguish MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MODE is ON, Bit7 of EVENT is OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, strobe signals are output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. Transmission of the strobe signal of Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed since transmission of this strobe signal, and a second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed since this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive a command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, and obtains the effect control command in the interrupt processing. It has become. Also, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs on the basis of the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (timer interrupt process periodically executed) based on another interrupt. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the processing, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a game operation related to the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decoration symbol variation display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, the gaming ball enters the middle starting opening 34, the right starting opening 33 or the lower right starting opening 35 (winning). The main control unit 20 performs a "big hit lottery" by random number lottery. The main control unit 20 variably displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b based on the lottery result to start the special symbol variation display game, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, displays the result as a special symbol Derivative display on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a big hit lottery based on winning on the middle starting opening 34 or the right starting opening 33 and a big hitting pulling on the bottom right starting opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery results regarding the middle starting opening 34 and the right starting opening 33 are derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hitting lottery results regarding the lower right starting opening 35 are derived on the special symbol display device 38b side . Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed on the condition that the gaming ball has entered the middle starting opening 34 or the right starting opening 33, and the first special symbol variation display is displayed. The game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that the game ball has entered the lower right start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed to start the second special symbol variation display game. It has become. Then, when the special symbol variation display game in the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after the predetermined variation display time has elapsed, in the case where the big hit lottery result is "hit (big hit, small hit)" Is a predetermined "hit" mode, otherwise the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed so that the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed. It has become.

  In the present specification, for the convenience of description, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second on the special symbol display device 38b side The special symbol variation display game of is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". Also, unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special figure"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special" The symbol variation display game 2 is simply referred to as "special symbol variation display game".

  Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, along with this, the decoration symbol (proactive game symbol) is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decoration symbol variation display game is started, And various effects are developed. When the special symbol variation display game is over, the decorative symbol variation display game is also finished, and the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating a big hit lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the big hit lottery result The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

  Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is "big hit" (when the big hit lottery result is "big hit"), an effect reflecting the result is developed in the decorative symbol variation display game. Then, when the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, a display state of 7 segments “7”) in which the special symbol indicates a big hit, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right In each display area of "", the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects "big hit" (for example, in each display area of "left", "middle" and "right", three decorative symbols are "7" "7" " It is stopped and displayed in the display state of 7 ".

  In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game is ended, along with which the decorative symbol variation display game is ended, and as a result, the symbol pattern of "big hit" is derived and displayed After that, the upper large winning opening solenoid 42c (see FIG. 3) provided in the first special variation winning device 42 operates (see FIG. 3) and the open door 42b opens and closes in a predetermined operation pattern, whereby the upper large winning opening 40 opens and closes. Or the lower special winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the second special variation winning device 52 is activated and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined operation pattern, whereby the lower large winning opening The special game state (big hit game) occurs which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In this big hit game, until the opening time of the big winning opening is a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 28.5 seconds, for example), or the number of gaming balls that have won the big winning opening (winning balls to big winning opening) There is a predetermined number (maximum winning number: the upper limit number of winning balls allowed for the opening opening or opening of the opening by one operation of the role: for example, 15 (upper large winning opening 40) "Round game" that the winning area is opened or enlarged until the number 10 (lower large winning opening 50)) is reached, and the big winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is satisfied. The defined number of defined rounds (for example, up to 16 rounds) is repeated.

  When the big hit game is started, an opening effect for notifying that the big hit is started is performed first, and after the opening effect is finished, a round game is performed a plurality of times with the predetermined number of predetermined rounds as the upper limit. Then, after the defined number of rounds, an ending effect notifying that the big hit is finished is performed, whereby the big hit game is finished. That is, the big hit game is roughly divided into an opening effect period, a round game execution period having the maximum number of rounds as an upper limit, and an ending effect period.

  With regard to the information necessary for the execution of the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, the main control unit 20 first enters the game ball into the right start opening 33, the middle start opening 34 or the lower right start opening 35 (winning) Specifically, based on the condition that the game ball is detected by the start opening sensor 33a, 34a or 35a and the start condition (start condition for the special symbol) is satisfied, "big hit", "small hit", Or 'Loss lottery' to draw a lottery whether it is either or 'big hit' if it was a 'big hit', if it was a 'small hit' its small hit type And if it was a "loss", the big hit lottery including 'symbol lottery (win type (hit type) lottery)' to draw the lost type will be made (If the big hit, small hit, or lost type is one type, It is necessary to do classification lottery Because there is no, the lottery may be omitted), based on the lottery result information, a special symbol to be finally stopped and displayed according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the winning classification (hereinafter referred to as "special stopped symbol" To determine). Then, as a production control command for specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern specification command" including at least fluctuation pattern information of a special symbol (for example, information on a big hit lottery result and a fluctuation time of the special symbol) is directed to the production control unit 24 side. Send. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, in order to make the variation of the effect abundant, the “decorative symbol specification command” including the information of the special stop symbol (the symbol lottery result information (the information regarding the hit type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24 It is supposed to be.

  The variation pattern information of the special symbol can include information specifying the presence or absence of a specific advance notice effect (for example, "reach effect" or "simulated continuous effect" described later). In detail, the variation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into the "hit variation pattern" in the case of the hit and the "loss variation pattern" in the case of the loss according to the big hit lottery result, and these variation patterns For example, 'reach variation pattern' which specifies the occurrence of reach effect, 'normal variation pattern' which does not specify the occurrence of reach effect, 'pseudo-connected reach variation pattern' which specifies the occurrence of pseudo continuous effect and reach effect, pseudo A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as 'pseudo-connected normal fluctuation pattern', which specifies the generation of continuous effects and does not specify the generation of reach effects. In addition, in order to secure the production time of reach production or pseudo-series production, basically, the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation pattern or the pseudo-connected fluctuation pattern is determined to be longer than that of the normal fluctuation pattern.

  Based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decoration symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs time series during the decoration symbol variation display game. Decide the contents of the presentation (the presentation scenario such as notice presentation) and the decoration pattern (decorative stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and change the decorative pattern according to the time schedule based on the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern and display the decoration Run the symbol variation display game. Thereby, in time with the variation display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the decoration symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variably displayed, and during the period of the special symbol variation display game and the decoration symbol variation display game The period of time becomes substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36 or the light display device 45a or the sound generating device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, reproduction (image effect) of the image on the liquid crystal display device 36, reproduction (sound effect) of the sound effect, and lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized.

  Thus, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected in the decorative symbol variation display game. The two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol variation display game)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the main control unit 20 performs a "subtract lottery" by random number lottery based on the fact that the gaming ball passes (winning) in the normal symbol starting opening 37. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a, and the normal symbol variation display game is started, and after a predetermined time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED Stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assistance hit", the display portion of the normal symbol display device 39a is in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are in the lighting state, or "○" and " Among the LEDs representing “×”, the LED on the “o” side is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of this "assisting hit", the normal motorized combination solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) operates and the movable piece 47 opens and closes in a predetermined operation pattern, whereby the right start port 33 is opened. The game ball is in a state in which the game ball is likely to flow (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "Pu-Peng opening game") occurs more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (normal state). In this common use open game, the movable piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 allows the opening time of the right start opening 33 to elapse until a predetermined time elapses, or the number of gaming balls won in the right start opening 33 is a predetermined number (for example, The winning area is opened until the number 4) is reached, and the right start opening 33 is closed when any of these conditions is satisfied. The condition under which the right start opening 33 is closed is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the right start opening 33, or based on only the number of gaming balls won in the right start opening 33. It may be.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the general power release game, etc., each start opening 33 to 35 or the normal symbol start opening 37 is won. When a corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied when there is an input of a detection signal from the start port sensors 33a to 35a or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a, the variable display game is started As data relating to the rights, except for those involved in the variable display, the maximum number of pending storages (for example, a maximum of four) which is a predetermined upper limit value is reserved and stored. The game ball relating to the pending data on hold or the pending data not provided for the symbol variation display operation is also referred to as "operation pending ball". A dedicated hold indicator (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the gaming machine 1 or a hold display provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display 36 in order to clarify the number of operation hold balls to the player Lights the display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation pending balls for the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are respectively stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 up to four and reserved as the number of times of variation determination of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the special storage 1, the special design 2, and the maximum memory number (maximum holding memory number) of each operation pending ball number regarding the normal symbol are not particularly limited. In addition, all or a part of the maximum number of pending storages of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game property.

(Simultaneous variation type: Fig. 7 (A))
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the variable display operation of the special symbol 1 in the special symbol display device 38a and the variable display operation of the special symbol 2 in the special symbol display device 38b can be executed independently. It has become. That is, it is a configuration of a so-called "simultaneous variation type" pachinko gaming machine in which the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the variation display of the special symbol 2 can be performed in parallel. In the case of this simultaneous variation type, since both special symbols can perform variation display operation in parallel, for example, during the execution of a hit game for one special symbol, the variation time of the other special symbol is There may be a case where the operation is finished and stopped with a hit symbol (a symbol showing a big hit (big hit symbol) or a symbol showing a small hit (small hit symbol)). However, since the hit game is executed for one of the special symbols 1 and 2, it is not possible to execute a hit game for both the special symbols 1 and 2. Therefore, it is necessary to devise not to stop and display both the special symbols 1 and 2 simultaneously with the big hit symbol (during final display, during a hit game, etc.).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7 (A), for example, when the variation display of the special symbols 1 and 2 is executed in parallel, the variation time of one of the special symbols is over, and the other special symbols are preceded. In the case where the stop symbol is displayed in the hit symbol, even if the other special symbol is fluctuating display, the fluctuation time is forcibly ended and the symbol (loss symbol) indicating the loss is stopped (forced loss stop control). In addition, when one special symbol is hit first and is stopped and displayed with the symbol, the fluctuation display is continued while the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is interrupted (the stop is not displayed), and the one special symbol is When resuming the measurement after the end of the hit game related to the hit symbol, it is not necessary to forcibly stop the lost symbol (measurement interrupt control). However, in the case where one special symbol is first displayed with a lost symbol, the other special symbol will hit and then there is no problem even if it stops in the symbol, so the fluctuation is continued as it is. In the present embodiment, a simultaneous fluctuation type of "big hit forced loss · small hit measurement interrupted type" in which a forced loss stop is performed in the case of a big hit and measurement is interrupted in the case of a small hit is adopted.

(3-2. Game state)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned big hit that is the special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a “probability fluctuation function (probability change function)” in which the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) takes on its functional units. There are two types of this: a probability variation function (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") according to a special symbol and a probability variation function according to a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol probability variation function").

  The special symbol probability change function is advantageous over the normal gaming state by changing the big hit lottery probability from a low probability (for example, 1/320) to a high probability (for example, 1/137) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) It is a function that generates a "high probability state". In addition, the normal symbol probability variation function is changed from a low probability (for example, 1/200) to a high probability (for example 199/200) where the lottery probability per assistance is a predetermined probability (ordinary probability) from the normal gaming state Is also a function to generate an advantageous "auxiliary hit probability change state".

  Further, the main control unit 20 is provided with a “variation time shortening function (time reduction function)” that bears the function unit. There are two types of time-saving functions (hereinafter referred to as "special-design time-shorting functions") related to special symbols and time-shorting functions (hereinafter referred to as "normal-pattern time-shorting functions") related to ordinary designs.

  The special symbol time short function generates the "special symbol time short state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (the average time for the special symbol to start changing after the variation starts) Function. Under the game state (special symbol time short state) in which the special symbol time short function is in operation, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened, and the big hit per unit time than the normal gaming state The number of lottery times is improved, and the number of lottery times is improved. In addition, the normal symbol time short function reduces the average time required for one normal symbol variation display game (average time from when the normal symbol starts to change until it is stopped and displayed). Function to generate “ Under the game state (normal symbol time short state) in which the normal symbol time short function is in operation, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened, and assistance per unit time is more than the normal gaming state. It will be in the number-of-lots-of-lots improvement state where the number of rounds of lottery per lot improves. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of activated balls, but in this case, the time saving function is not activated, It is by other control processing.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 bears the functional unit. The open extension function is a function to generate an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time of the movable piece 47 and the number of times of opening thereof) of the movable piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is extended. This open extension state is referred to as a so-called "electric chew support state". Under the playing state (opening extension state) in which the opening extension function is in operation, the opening operation period (starting opening opening state time) of the movable piece 47 is extended, for example, from 0.1 seconds to 3.7 seconds, and The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from 1 time (when the open extension function is inactive) to 3 times (when the open extension function is active), and the movable piece 47 operates per unit time than in the normal gaming state. It will be in the operation rate improvement state which a rate improves.

  By activating one or more types of each function as described above, it is possible to bring about a change in the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol time variation function, the special symbol time variation function, the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol time variation function, and the game state in which the open extension function is operated are referred to as "certain variation state", and from among these functions The gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function has been removed is referred to as "time saving state", and the gaming state in which at least the special symbol probability changing function is activated and the open extension function is not activated is referred to as "latency state". Further, the state in which all the functions are not in operation (non-operation) is referred to as "normal gaming state (normal state)". Therefore, focusing on the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, if the gaming state is "time saving state" or "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes "low probability" and the gaming state is "latent state" Or, in the case of "probable state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes "high probability".

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol time reduction function is activated in the case of the probability change state, the time reduction state, and the latent state. During the latent state, the special symbol time shortening function according to the special figure 2 is activated, and the special figure 2 is in the special symbol time shortening state.

  Further, under the electric chow support state (hereinafter referred to as the “power support presence state”), the operation rate (opening time and opening number) of the movable piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 41 is improved and the right starting opening 33 is Since the winning rate is increased and the winning frequency per unit time is increased, the gaming state is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the electric support state is not in effect (hereinafter referred to as the “non-power support state”). When paying attention to the presence or absence of the electric chow support state, if the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "latency state", the "non-power support state" is set, and the gaming state is "time saving state" or "probable change state" If it is, it becomes 'power support presence state'. A game state that focuses on the operating status of each function (special symbol probability variation function, special symbol time variation function, normal symbol probability variation function, ordinary symbol time variation function, and open extension function) regarding determination of the big hit lottery probability and presence or absence of power support condition. Is called "internal gaming state". With regard to the operation status of each function, on the main control unit 20 side, the activation / inactivation is managed by the ON / OFF status of the flag corresponding to each function, and the internal gaming state type is also "playing state number YJ It is managed using the identifier (YJ = normal "00H", short time "01H", latency "02H", definite variation "03H", etc.) ".

  In addition, during the big hit, a big winning opening is opened and closed hit game (big hit game) occurs, but all functions are made inactive for the above-mentioned each function, basically, under the same game state as the above-mentioned normal state Placed in However, during the small hit game (small hit game), it is different from the above-mentioned big hit game. Even in the small hit game, it is a hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed in the same manner as in the big hit game, but when the small hit is won, the transition of the internal gaming state itself is not performed. That is, during the small hit game, the gaming state at the time of the small hit is continued. For example, if you win a small hit while in a time saving state, you will be placed under time saving state during a small hit, and if you win a small hit while in a latent state, you will be placed under latent state even during a small hit game .

<4. About the hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(About 4-1 and per type and per game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning type selected in the above special symbol variation display game, that is, the "big hit 1 to 8" belonging to the big hit type, the small hitting type There are several types of hits such as "small hits" belonging to The notations such as “16R” and “8R” shown in the drawings respectively indicate the prescribed number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). In addition, a plurality of types of loses (misses A, B, C) are provided as “losing” types other than the big hit and the small hit (see FIG. 35). Moreover, although a small hit is one type, you may provide multiple types.

  The jackpot type is a hit that becomes an operation trigger of the condition device, and the "small hit" is a hit that belongs to the "non-big hit" type that does not become an operation trigger of the condition device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the character continuous actuation device for playing a round game, and a combination of a specific special symbol is displayed, or a game ball When it passes through the specific territory inside the big winning a prize mouth (except for those which win prize winning a prize mouth while the bonus continuous actuating device is in operation), it means something which operates. Moreover, "a prize continuous actuation device" means what can operate a special motorized prize continuously. Further, the special motorized part is an electric part that opens or enlarges the entrance of the big winning opening. Therefore, in the case of the small hit, the round game itself is not executed, and the big winning in the operation mode (simulated round game) identical or similar to the round game by the big hit or a totally different operation mode from the round game by the big hit The opening and closing operation of the mouth is controlled. A hit that belongs to the big hit type, a hit that belongs to the small hit type is a transition opportunity to the special gaming state with the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening (the occurrence opportunity of the hit game), and in this respect, the small hit is , It is different from mere "loss".

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the big hit 1 to 4 is a big hit lottery target of the special symbol 1 side, and the big hit 5 to 8 and the small hit are a big hit lottery target of the special symbol 2 side. , It is possible to win a small hit only on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side).

  In addition, according to the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit 1-8, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is determined. For example, the jackpot 1 is transferred to the “latency state (high probability, no power support)” regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, and the jackpot 2 is in the normal state for gaming at the time of winning In the case, the state is shifted to the “probability state (high probability, presence of charge)”, and in the case of the latency, time reduction, or probability state, the state is shifted to the “latent state”. In addition, the big hit 4, 8 is a big hit that becomes a transition opportunity to the time saving state (low probability, with power support), if the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state "time saving state A (time reduction 50 times) In the case of the latent probability, time reduction, or definite variation state, the state is shifted to "time reduction state B (7 times reduction time)". The other jackpots 3, 6 to 7 are as shown in FIG.

  In addition, big hit 1 ~ 8, the maximum opening time of large winning a prize opening in one round game, “long opening time of the time width that the possibility that the number of winning a prize winning a large winning a prize reaches the maximum winning number (9 pieces) can be expected (For example, 29.8 seconds) is set to "long open jackpot". Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the profit state in the big hit game becomes higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively larger. In addition, due to the relationship between the payout rate, a part of the jackpot "short opening jackpot" the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game will be "short opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds)" You may provide. In this short opening big hit, since the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is very short, it is possible to make a big hit where the winning can hardly be expected (the winning may be impossible). Also, any jackpot can be determined appropriately for the maximum number of rounds.

  The number of times of execution of the special symbol variation display game (the number of times of variation of the special symbol) is a predetermined prescribed number of times (special symbol variation display game) for the “latency condition”, “certain variation condition”, and “time saving condition” according to this embodiment. Continued until the end of 1 and 2 (total number of executions of special symbols 1 and 2)) and when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a big hit (except for a small hit) within the specified number of times, The next game is shifted to the normal state (normal game state). In the case of the present embodiment, the predetermined certain number of times (ST specified number of times) is set (the number cut type (ST machine type)), and the time saving state is 7 times (for time saving state A) Fifty times (in the case of the time saving state B) are set. The above-mentioned ST specified number of times may not be determined for the latent state or the probability variation state, and a “generally probable machine type” may be used in which the high probability state is continued until the next big hit is won. The time saving state can be set to an appropriate number of times (for example, 100 times, etc.). In addition, the transition to the latent state or the definite change state may be conditional on the game ball having entered a specific area in the big winning opening (V positive change machine type).

(About the hit game by the small hit)
In the small hit game (hereinafter referred to as "small hit game"), the lower large winning opening 50 is opened one or more times (in this embodiment, once). Here, since the "small hit" is a hit type that does not become an operation trigger of the "condition device" as described above, a round game such as "big hit" is not executed. That is, the opening / closing operation of the lower large winning opening 50 in the small hit game is a pseudo round game. Here, the opening time of the lower large winning opening 50 is a case where the opening of the lower large winning opening 50 is performed once if the opening of the lower large winning opening 50 is performed once due to a legal request. It is determined that the sum of the opening times does not exceed 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the opening time of the lower large winning opening 50 is set to 1.2 seconds. The opening time is determined as an opening time in which one or several game balls can be won, in consideration of the arrangement pattern (not shown) of the game nails and the flow path correction plates 37d and 40d. With regard to the closing condition of the lower large winning opening 50 in the small hit game, if the maximum opening and closing operation time of the lower large winning opening 50 has elapsed, or the number of gaming balls winning in the lower large winning opening 50 is the maximum winning number (for example , 9) is reached, or one of the conditions is satisfied. In the case of the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls that have won in the lower large winning opening 50 does not reach the maximum number of winnings within the above-mentioned maximum opening / closing operation time (within 1.2 seconds). After 1.2 seconds of the maximum opening and closing operation time of the mouth 50 has elapsed, specifically, after a series of opening and closing operations of the big winning opening are executed, the small hit game is ended.

  Further, after the small hit by the small hit, the internal gaming state at the time of the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit is not performed. Therefore, the internal gaming state at the time of the small hit winning and the internal gaming state after the small hit gaming both become the same internal gaming state. In this respect, the nature is different from the "big hit" where transition control of the internal gaming state can be performed.

  The small hit may be of one type or a plurality of types. In the case of providing a plurality of types of small hits, it is preferable to make the mode of the small hit game different. For example, when providing at least a first small hit and a second small hit, the first small hit executes a small hit game with a large winning opening opening time of 1.0 seconds, and the second small hit is the first small hit. It is possible to execute a small hit game in which the opening time of the big winning opening is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the hit. As described above, by providing a plurality of small hits for executing small hit games having different opening times of the big winning openings, it is possible to add an emphasis or speed to the increase in the speed of small hit rushes described later. It can be improved. When a plurality of types of small hits are provided, their winning probability can be determined as appropriate. If it is a gameplay that produces a sense of increasing ball speed, the small hit type with a relatively long opening time of the big winning opening is set to a high probability (in the above example, the first small hit is greater than the second small hit) If it is a game feature that sets the speed increase feeling slowing down, it sets the small hit type with a relatively short opening time of the big winning opening to a high probability (in the above example, the first small hit) Is determined to have a lower probability than the second small hit). In addition, the type of the big hit can be appropriately determined according to the game property.

<5. About the production>
(5-1. Effect mode)
Next, the effect mode (state of effect) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of effect modes that produce effects related to the game state, and is configured to be able to control transition between the effect modes in response to the transition of the game state. ing. In the production mode, a "normal production mode" corresponding to the "normal state", a "latency production mode (small hitting rush production mode)" corresponding to the "latency state", and a "probable change production" corresponding to the "probable change state" A plurality of effect modes are provided according to each gaming state, such as "mode" and "time reduction effect mode" corresponding to "time reduction state".

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a functional unit (effect state transition control means) that performs transition control between a plurality of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 designates a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, designates the current gaming state or designates that the gaming state is to be shifted. Based on the effect control command, transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes is possible in a manner that maintains consistency with the gaming state on the main control unit 20 side. For a specific effect control command, a variation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, a demonstration display command 1, a demonstration display command 2, a predetermined command transmitted during a hit (big hit start command specifying big hit start, big hit end There is such as a big hit end command to specify. In addition, the effect control unit 24 has a functional unit (effect state management means) that manages an effect mode related to the gaming state. The effect control unit 24 (effect state management means) manages the current effect mode in such a manner as to maintain consistency with the main control unit 20 side.

(5-2. Effects under each effect mode)
In each of the effect modes, the background as the background of the variation display screen of the decorative symbol in each of the effect modes so that the player can be grasped under the effect mode corresponding to what game state. The display is controlled to be switched to different background effects. In addition to changing background effects according to each effect mode, each effect mode can be implemented by using decorative patterns of different patterns corresponding to each effect mode, or changing sound effects, light effects, etc. It can also be suggested.

(5-3. Notice production)
Next, advance notice effects will be described. The effect control unit 24 is variously associated with the current effect mode and the big hit lottery result based on the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the change pattern information included in the change pattern designation command. It is configured to be able to control the appearance of the "notice effect". Such an advance notice effect indicates (predicted) the degree of expectation (expected degree of winning) whether or not the player has won the hit type, and works as a “scratching effect” to give the player a sense of expectation of winning. Typical examples of the preview effects include "prediction effects" and player participation type effects in addition to "reach effect" and "simulated continuous effect". The effect control unit 24 is provided with a preview effect control means capable of performing (presentation) control of these effects.

  The "reach effect" refers to an effect mode involving a reach state, and more specifically, an effect mode in which the game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. For reach effects, there are multiple types of reach effects associated with the winning expectation, for example, reach effects with a relatively low expectation of winning such as N reach (normal reach), and a winning expectation with a relatively high probability of winning than N reach The reach effect (SP reach effect) is included. Many of the "SP reach" have a relatively long presentation time (variation time) even with the N reach in order to give the player a sense of winning expectations. The SP reach includes, for example, a normal SP reach developed from N reach to SP reach, and an evolved SP reach developed from N reach to SP reach and further developed to another SP reach.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of N reach such as “N reach 1 to 2” for N reach, and a plurality of SP reach such as “SP reach A to C, weak SP reach, strong SP reach”, etc. There are various types of SP reach. In addition, as for the relationship of winning expectation, the relationship of "N reach 1 <N reach 2" and "SP reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C" is held. N reach and SP reach include various reach depending on the game state (see FIGS. 34 to 36 described later).

  The "simulated sequence effect" refers to an effect mode involving a pseudo-continuous variation display state (pseudo-variation) of a decorative symbol. In this "pseudo-variation", in the decorative symbol variation display game, a part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (including the reach state and the non-reach state), and re-variation of the decorative symbol from the temporary stop A variation display mode in which the display operation of performing the display operation is repeated one or more times. This point is different from the "prediction advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect)" described later that is developed across a plurality of symbol variation display games. The occurrence rate of such “pseudo-series” is basically determined so that the probability of winning is higher as the number of times of pseudo fluctuation increases, and for example, as the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is relatively larger, SP Expected occurrence of reach C (high expectation SP reach) is increasing.

  In addition, with "pre-reading advance notice effect", with regard to the operation reserving ball (undigested operation reserving ball) which has not been provided for execution of the symbol variation display game (variation display operation of special symbol), it is mainly a suspension display mode or This is an effect mode that can notify in advance the degree of expectation for winning about the operation holding ball using background effect and the like of the symbol variation display game executed earlier. In the symbol variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", various effects such as so-called "character advance effect" and "step-up advance effect" are generated, and the game content is enhanced.

  Here, the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display area on the upper side of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 displays the decorative symbol fluctuation display game (displays the fluctuation display effect or the notice effect of the decorative symbol) Display area) is provided, and in the lower display area in the screen, a hold display area 76 (hold display area a1 to d1) for displaying the number of operation hold balls on the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol A hold display area 77 (hold display sections a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation hold balls on the 2 side is provided. With respect to the presence or absence of the operation holding ball, that is notified by a predetermined holding display mode. In the illustration, the current operation is suspended when the presence or absence of the operation suspension ball is in the lighting state (operation suspension ball present: “○ (white circle mark)” shown) or the light off state (no operation suspension ball: dashed circle shown). An example in which information on the number of balls is notified is shown.

  The indication (presence indication) regarding the presence or absence of the action pending ball is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (the order of winnings), and in each of the pending indication areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action pending sphere is all actions in the pending indication. Among the holding balls, it is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) operation holding ball on the time axis. Further, on the left side of the reserve display areas 76 and 77, a variation display area 78 for indicating the operation reserve ball currently provided for the special symbol variation display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the in-movement display area 78 is configured such that an image in which the icon of the pending game K currently being played for the game is placed appears on the icon of the reception J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during the game execution. As an icon, it moves on the icon of the seat J in the display area 78 during variation, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

  When the operation pending ball occurs, the main control unit 20 reads the pre-reading determination information related to the big hit lottery result and the number of operation pending balls at the time of pre-reading determination (the number of existing operation pending balls including the operation pending ball generated this time) The "hold addition command" for designating is sent to the effect control unit 24 (see step S361 in FIG. 17). The hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte data (prize command 2 (MODE)) that enables identification of the number of operation hold balls at the pre-read determination and the lower byte enable identification of the pre-read determination information And side data (prize command 2 (EVENT)) (see FIG. 17).

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, based on the pre-reading determination information included in the hold control command, the effect control process regarding “pre-reading advance notice effect” is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Specifically, based on the information included in the hold addition command, the advance notice lottery to draw the execution availability of the advance notice effect is performed, and if it is won, the advance notice effect according to the expected expectation (for example, described later) Make the special hold display mode etc.) appear. The probability of winning by the above-mentioned advance notice lottery is higher in the case of “big hit” than in the case of “loss”, and in the case of reach type with a relatively high expectation of winning, and advance notice effect occurs. Depending on whether or not, the winning expectation for a big hit or a specific hit type is indicated.

  Here, the preread determination information specifically relates to a big hit lottery result (big hit lottery result at the start of change) executed when the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol change display game in the main control unit 20. Information and information on the prefetch fluctuation pattern obtained when prefetching the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation, that is, this prefetch judgment information is at least the prefetch judgment result of the winning lottery result at the fluctuation start (preemption crash result) Information is included, and in addition, it is possible to include pre-reading determination result (pre-reading symbol result) information of symbol lottery results and pre-reading determination result (pre-reading variation pattern) information of fluctuation patterns at the start of fluctuation. About what kind of information the hold addition command including information is to be sent to the effect control unit 24, it is possible to appropriately determine according to the content notified by the pre-reading advance notice. Note that the "pre-reading fluctuation pattern" obtained by the pre-reading determination when the operation holding ball occurs need not necessarily be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" itself obtained when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation . For example, in the case where the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern designating “pseudo N (N = 2, 3) + SP reach A”, the content designated by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is “pseudo N + SP reach A You may designate that it is not the kind itself of reach production called "," but it is "SP reach A type" which is the main point.

  In the case of this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons of the holding display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, for example, the holding icon which is the target of the pre-reading notice is a normal holding display. "Holding display change system" such as changing from white of (normal holding display mode) to special holding color or special color holding display such as blue, green, red, rainbow colors of notice display (special hold display mode) A preview effect is performed. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the operation suspension ball of the hatched suspension display section b1 is changed to the special suspension display. Here, the blue, green, red, and rainbow display of the hold icon means that the expectation for winning is high in the order of this color, and the display of the rainbow hold icon in particular is determined to be a big hit It has become a premium hold icon (presence notice). Therefore, the hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation hold. However, in the case of executing pre-reading preview effects, the hold display mode of the corresponding hold display portion among the hold display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined pre-reading notice display mode (special hold display mode). This acts as a means to generate preview advance effects. The existing operation pending balls are sequentially digested triggered by the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, the display position of the holding display unit corresponding to the existing operation holding ball is moved up (shifted to the left sequentially) to indicate that one operation holding ball has been digested, and the display number is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-described non-usual hold display mode continues to be continuously displayed while changing the display position of the hold display.

  Next, the player participation type effect will be described. The player participation type effect is an effect mode belonging to a so-called "button advance effect", and the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, an operation such as pressing, long press, continuous hitting, etc.) on the effect button 13 (operation means). , And is a notice effect mode in which the contents of the effect may change. In the player participation type effect, an operation instruction effect for instructing a predetermined operation to the effect button 13 appears in the predetermined button effective period, and the effect button 13 is operated during the button effective period. The effect mode currently appearing is changed to another effect mode (effect at the time of operation) (for example, character display changes, special sound effects or light effects occur, etc.), effect modes before and after operation (effect content) In accordance with the above, it has become a notice effect mode in which the expectation of winning is predicted.

(About surface fluctuation, back fluctuation: Fig. 7 (b))
Since the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is a simultaneous variation type, a decorative symbol variation display game corresponding to each of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, but two symbols To simultaneously display the effects relating to the variable display game is bothersome for the player and causes confusion as to which of the symbol fluctuation display games to concentrate on. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the special figures 1 and 2 are simultaneously changing (both of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 are being executed), the symbol according to one of the special symbols according to the game state The effects of the variable display game are preferentially shown. For example, in the normal state, the game is advanced with the aim of winning in the middle starting opening 34, so the symbol variation display game 1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 side becomes dominant, and on the other hand, in the latent state If the game is in the latent state, the game proceeds with the aim of winning in the lower right start opening 35, so the symbol variation display game 2 corresponding to the special symbol 2 side is dominant. Taking this point into consideration, if it is any one of the normal state, the probability change state, and the time saving state, the effect is realized as the decorative symbol change display game 1 as the main effect (effect on the table change display state (table change state) side) If it is a latent state, the decorative symbol variation display game 2 is made to appear as a main effect (see the correspondence in FIG. 7 (b)). For example, in the normal state, since the special symbol 1 is in the table fluctuation state, the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal display device 36 displays the fluctuation display operation of the decoration symbol, the notice effect and the like according to the decoration symbol fluctuation display game 1. Therefore, if the current gaming state is any one of the normal state, the probability change state, and the time saving state, the main effect is for the symbol variation display game 1 (special figure 1 table variation state), in principle, the symbol variation The notice effect (reach effect etc.) for the display game 2 and the hold icon and the decoration pattern are not displayed (special figure 2 back fluctuation state). If the current gaming state is the latent state, the main effect is for the symbol variation display game 2 (special figure 2 table variation state), and the notice effect (reach effect etc.) for the symbol variation display game 1 Do not display the icon and the decoration icon or the decoration icon (special figure 1 back fluctuation state). However, in the case of the present embodiment, the effect on the back fluctuation display state (back fluctuation state) side is not necessarily manifested at all, for example, in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 36 As the sub effect), a dedicated display area 160 for the number of reserved items and the presence or absence of the variable display according to the special symbols 1 and 2 is provided (see, for example, reference numeral 160 in FIGS. 31A to 31G). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the surface fluctuation state may be abbreviated as “surface fluctuation” and the back surface fluctuation state may be abbreviated as “back surface fluctuation”.

  Note that, for example, when it is assumed that the player is making a left-hand strike under the “right-handed advantageous” gaming state (during a hit game, a latent state, a short time state, a positive change state), the effect control unit 24. If there is a win in the middle opening 34, "right strike warning notification effect" to warn the player that right strike is revealed, the player is right under the "left strike advantageous" gaming state (normal state) If it is assumed that the player is hitting, for example, if there is a winning on the combination gate 57, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the right starting opening 33, or the lower right starting opening 35, the player is indicated to hit the left A warning notification control means is provided which causes "left-hand warning notification effect" to be warned to appear.

(5-4. Production means)
Various effects in the gaming machine 1 are produced by the effect means provided in the gaming machine. Such an effect means may be a stimulus transfer means capable of exerting an effect by appealing to human perception, such as sight, hearing, touch, etc., and light generating means (light effect means such as decoration lamp 45 or LED device Sound generator (sound effect means) such as the speaker 46, effect display device (display means) such as the liquid crystal display device 36, a pressure device for transmitting contact pressure to the body of the operator, wind pressure to the body of the player A wind pressure device or a movable body part that exhibits a visual effect by its operation is a representative example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the same vision as the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes an image-independent device (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it refers to a type that produces effects by image display, and devices that produce effects by other than images, such as a seven-segment display, are included in the concept of the effect display device.

<6. Transition of gaming state: FIG. 6>
Next, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, in the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the “normal state”, the “latency state”, the “time saving state”, and the “probable state”.

  As described above, the "normal state" and the "latent state" are the "no support" state where the electric support function is not provided, but the probability of assistance is not zero, and the ball is entered into the normal symbol starting port 37 Then, if it becomes an auxiliary hit, a common power open game occurs in which the movable piece 47 (electric chew) of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 operates. However, the per-selection lottery probability is under the low probability state (1/200), and the operation time (open time) of the movable piece 47 is very short (opened once for 0.1 seconds). Winning for is very difficult. On the other hand, since the "time saving state" and the "probability changing state" are the "power support available" status to which the electric chow support function is added, the lottery probability per assistance is put under the high probability status (199/200), and The opening time of the movable piece 47 is long (3 times of opening for 1.2 seconds + 2 times of opening for 0.5 seconds), and winning on the right start opening 33 is facilitated. In the case of this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is approximately the same time as 1000 ms in the normal state and in the latent state, 1004 ms in the definite variation state and the short time state, and the variation pattern is also one type. . Of course, the variation time of the normal symbol may or may not be the same with or without the power support. Moreover, you may provide multiple types of fluctuation patterns of the normal symbol from which fluctuation time differs.

  In the case of the present embodiment, it is changed depending on the game state as to what kind of manner the player will strike to achieve an advantageous situation. Specifically, in the normal state, it is advantageous to set the aim so that the game ball passes through the left flow-down path 3b, "left-handed" is advantageous, and in the case of a positive change state, a latent state or a short time state, It is advantageous to "right-hand" to aim the ball so that it passes through the downstream flow path 3c. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, the features of each gaming state will be described.

(About in the normal state)
During the above-mentioned "normal state", "left-handed" is advantageous, so the player advances the game while aiming at the left flow-down path 3b. That is, the game is advanced while receiving a big hit lottery (special symbol variation display game 1) on the side of the special figure 1 with the aim of winning in the middle starting opening 34.

  By the way, in the case of the present embodiment, there is no small hit in the lottery object type on the special figure 1 side, and a small hit exists in the lottery object type on the special figure 2 side (see FIG. 4) The small hit winning probability is also about 1 / 1.14, which is a very high probability (see FIG. 4). Therefore, there is a risk that a "right strike" is made in a normal state to aim for a small hit and an attempt to obtain a winning ball by a small hit game may be made. However, in the normal state, the variation time of the special symbol 1 is 112 seconds at the longest (see the column 'RUSH direct hit reach' in the variation pattern type in FIG. 34), but the variation time of the special symbol 2 is , “Very long fluctuation pattern” having a very long fluctuation time of 600 seconds (when lost, small hit time) is selected (10 minutes fluctuation except for the column 'fluctuation pattern type in FIG. 36' 1 to 6 ')). Therefore, even if "right-handed" is made in the normal state and the lower right starting opening 35 on the side of the special figure 2 is made to win, this super long fluctuation pattern (10 minutes of non-latency fluctuation 1 to 6) The wait time until the start of the small hit game becomes very long because the) is selected. Also, when the player wins the small hit, right after the player confirms the stop display (stop special symbol) of the special figure 2, or immediately after confirming the opening operation of the lower large winning opening 50, even if right start is started If the game ball reaches the open door 52b, even if the player hits the lower large winning opening 50, the lower large winning opening 50 is already closed. The winning of the lower large winning opening 50 can not be expected. Further, in the lottery object type on the side of the special view 2 in the normal state, there is no big hit (small hit rush determined big hit) type serving as a transition trigger to the “latency state” in which “small hit rush” occurs. Therefore, the act of "right-handing" in the normal state is extremely time-consuming in obtaining a profit, and it is highly likely to cause the loss of the game ball in the dark cloud, and the act is useless for the player. Be made to be an effective act, and the attacking is to be practically nullified.

(About under latent condition: Occurrence of small hit rush)
On the other hand, while in the "latency state", unlike in the normal state, "right-handed" is advantageous, and therefore the player advances the game while aiming at the right-flowing downward path 3c. Here, during the latent state, the variation time of the special symbol 2 at the time of winning a small hit is a "short variation pattern (high-speed variation pattern)" in which the variation time is 2 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 36). Further, the small hit winning rate on the side of the special figure 2 in the “latency state” is won with a very high probability of “approximately 1 / 1.14 (see FIG. 4)”. For this reason, when winning in the lower right start port 35, it wins almost every game small hit, and the short variation pattern is selected, a small hit game occurs in a short time, the lower large winning opening 50 is 1.2 Opened for seconds. Also, while in the latent state, the electric power support function is not provided, and it is placed under the 'powerless state' and almost no general power release game occurs (probability of auxiliary hit in the latent state is 1/200). Even if it occurs, the operation time of the movable piece 47 is very short, and it is difficult to win the right starting port 33.

  Therefore, under the latent state, the gaming balls having flowed down the right side flow path 3c of the gaming board 3 are first picked up by the flow path correction plate 37d and flow leftward on the flow path correction plate 37d. Then, it passes through the lower end of the flow path correction plate 37d and flows down on the open / close door 42b of the upper large winning opening 40, and rolls on the open / close door 42 to the right to flow downward from the lower end. Most of the game balls that have flowed down from the open / close door 42 are guided by the induction nail (not shown) of the game board to the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 41 side of the electric chew, that is, the right start opening 33 side, It is guided in the direction to get on the board 40d. Among them, the gaming ball guided to the one electric Chu side rolls the upper part of the movable piece 47 downward to the left without winning in the right start opening 33, since the game does not occur almost in the normal power open game. It flows down from the lower end 47 and is guided to either the lower right start port 35 side or the lower special fluctuation winning device 52 side for small hit. In the case of the present embodiment, approximately 40% of the gaming balls flowing down from the lower end of the movable piece 47 are guided to the lower right start port 35 side, and the remaining 60% are guided to the lower special fluctuation winning device 52 for small hit. Ru. That is, a situation is created in which many of the game balls launched are guided to the lower right start opening 35 for the special symbol variation display game 2 and the lower large winning opening 50 for the small hit.

  The game ball guided to the small hit lower prize winning opening 50 side wins the lower big winning opening 50 if the open door 52 b is opened. The game ball guided to the other flow guide plate 40d side falls toward the lower large winning opening 50 located diagonally to the lower left, and rarely achieves a prize. On the other hand, the gaming ball guided to the lower right starting opening 35 does not necessarily win the lower right starting opening 35, but the winning ratio is about 80%, and a relatively large number of gaming balls are right Win a lower starting opening 35.

  As described above, under the latent condition, since the regular power release game is difficult to occur, the right-handed game ball is positioned below it without being picked up by the electric chow, which is the lower right for Special Figure 2 Heading to the starting opening 35 and the special variation winning device 52 for small hits, many of them win in any of the winning openings. In addition, since the winning percentage to the lower right start opening 35 is also relatively high, the high speed fluctuation pattern is selected when winning a small hit, so the execution frequency per unit time of the special symbol fluctuation display game 2 compared to other gaming states Get higher. For this reason, in the latent state, a small hit game occurs frequently, and on the occasion of the small hit, an average of 1 to 2 wins occur on the lower large winning opening 50 (10 winning balls). It is supposed to be. That is, in the "latency state", a "small hit rush" occurs in which the balls are stacked by small hit consecutive houses, and the more the latent state continues (the more you get hooked without winning the big hit), the game Acquisition benefits for the elderly will increase.

(About the time saving state and the probability changing state)
On the other hand, the "time saving state" or the "probability changing state" is placed under the "power support present state" to which the power support function is provided. In this power support state, the public power release game occurs with high probability, and the opening time of the right start port 33 is also 0.1 seconds to 3.7 under the power support state (latency state, normal state). Extended to seconds. For this reason, most of the gaming balls flowing down the right flow down path 3c are picked up by the normal variation winning device 41 of the electric chew, and are configured so as not to substantially win in the lower right starting opening 35. Of course, not all of the gaming balls are necessarily picked up by the electric chow to win the right starting opening 33 for the special view 1, and the gaming balls that are spilled without winning in the right starting opening 33 are downstream specially There are cases in which the lower right starting opening 35 for FIG.

  Therefore, during the time saving state or the probability changing state, with respect to the symbol variation display game, the occurrence of the symbol variation display game 1 on the side of the special figure 1 becomes dominant, and the symbol variation display game 2 on the side of the special figure 2 does not easily occur. And the opposite situation. Further, even if the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed, when a small hit is won during the time saving state or the definite variation state, any of the "long 10 minutes non-latency variation 1 to 6" which is a super long variation pattern The variation pattern (variation time of 600 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 36), so a situation is created in which the small hit game itself is unlikely to occur for a long time although the small hit is won with a high probability. Therefore, the lower prize winning opening 50 is difficult to win, and the above-mentioned "small hit rush" in which the small hit game frequently occurs in a short time does not occur.

  As described above, although it is easy to get the right start port 33 of the special view 1 side start port to get a prize by the electric chow support function, the short time state or the definite change state is not accompanied by the small hit lash described above. The advantage for the player is overwhelmingly inferior to the latent state. Particularly in the case of the present embodiment, the transition probability to the latent state under short time condition or definite variation condition, that is, the “small hit rush” transition rate is also 50% in the special figure 2 side (see the big hit 5 in FIG. 4). On the other hand, it is 15% (see the big hit 1 and 2 in FIG. 4). In this respect as well, the degree of advantage for the player is lower than that of the latent state where the big hit lottery on the side of the special drawing 2 can be frequently received. In this point, if the state of time and state of electric assistance is in a definite state, it is definitely different from a general pachinko gaming machine whose profit state is increased.

  In the present embodiment, the "small hit rush" is generated under the latent condition, but the present invention is not limited to this. Under certain conditions, depending on the configuration of the special effects and various winning devices (41, 42, 51, etc.) arranged on the game board, the type of hit, the type of assistance per type, the game mode and the publicity game mode etc. A small hit lash may be generated under a short time condition (under a gaming condition accompanied by a power support condition).

(Normal state → big hit game)
Referring to FIG. 6, line L1 is a case where the jackpot lottery probability 1/320 is won in the special symbol variation display game 1 in the "normal state". When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 38a, the big hit game according to the winning type is executed by using the special hit variable winning device 42 for big hit. As shown in FIG. 4, there are jackpots 1 to 4 in the winning classification of the special figure 1, and each selection probability (lottery probability) of "symbol lottery" is 10/200 (5%) and 20/200 ( 10%), 100/200 (50%) and 70/200 (35%). Among them, when “big hit 1” which is a transition opportunity to the latent state is selected (line L2), “big bonus (small hit determined when big hit game)” is started. On the other hand, when the big hit 2 to 4 is selected (line L3), the "first battle bonus (small hit non-confirmed big hit game)" is started.

  During the above-mentioned big bonus, a special blessing effect is revealed as a bouncing effect, to celebrate the transition to the under-approval state, ie, "small hit rush". On the other hand, during the first battle bonus, a narrative effect having a story like a so-called "battle effect" such as concealing the jackpot type won this time as a hit effect is produced. Here, a battle rendition is shown that expresses how the main character and aliens fight. In this battle rendition, a battle rendition is developed in which the guess element of the big hit type is any of the big hit 2 to 4 is developed in each round game during 1 to 7 th eyes, and during the 7 th round game, As a result of the battle effect, the jackpot type won this time will be notified in a definite manner, that is, whether to be shifted to the probability change state or the time saving state, and whether the maximum number of rounds is 16R or 8R It is informed.

  The gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is determined according to the jackpot type that has been won this time, as described above (see FIG. 4). Regarding this, the line L4 shown in the figure is a route to be shifted to the "latency state" after the big hit game by the big hit 1 (normal time latent probability big hit), the line L5 is by the big hit 2, 3 (normal time oddity big hit) After the end of the big hit game, the route is shifted to the "probable change state", and the line L6 indicates a route to shift to the "time saving state" after the big hit game by the big hit 4 (normal time short hit).

(Latency status → small hit game → latency status)
During the latent state, the above-mentioned "small hit rush" may occur, which loops the small hit game as shown by line L7 → line L8. This small hit rush will continue as long as it keeps winning in 1 / 1.14 small hit without winning in 1/137 big hit. In the small hit game, the lower large winning opening 50 for small hitting is opened for 1.2 seconds, and the gaming ball reached without being guided to the lower right starting opening 35 side is in the lower large winning opening 50 during opening. Win a prize. In addition, there is no transition of the internal gaming state even if you win the small hit (a small hit is a hit that does not become a transition trigger of the internal gaming state), and when the small hit game is over, it returns to the original "latency state" Line L8), "small hit rush" is possible, and the number of balls acquired by the small hit consecutive villa increases, it is possible to obtain a large number of award balls in a short time.

  As described above, while in the latent state, the player aims to win a prize in the lower right start opening 35 for the special figure 2 by right-handing, and advances the game with expectation for the small hit series (small hit rush) I will let you. In addition, during the latent state, it will continue unless it wins the big hit 4, 8 of the short time big hit or the big hit 3, 6 or 7 (big hit that triggers the transition to the short time or positive change state). Ru. The player does not win these jackpots, and the current latency state continues, or, even if the jackpot is won, the latency win big hit (big hit) which becomes a transition opportunity to the latent state again. The game is advanced while expecting a win to 1, 2 and 5) (line L17).

  If the special symbol variation display game 1 is executed before the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed, the small hit rush will end unless the special symbol 1 side is lost. This is that when Special Figure 1 is won as a big hit (in the case of big hit fluctuation), in the big hit lottery of Special Figure 2, all the big hits are excluded from the symbol lottery targets, and it is considered as a small hit or lost (FIG. 18) Steps S413 and S414 (see steps S431 and S432 in FIG. 21), the small hit rush continues, but when the big hit fluctuation on the special view side ends, the special view 2 side is forcibly Since it is stopped by “the lost design” (see steps S485 to S489 in FIG. 24), the big hit game won on the special figure 1 side is started, and the execution of the variable display operation on the special figure 2 side is prohibited. is there. Therefore, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 during the latent condition is “overlapping variation per 4 minutes (variation time 240 seconds)” is selected in the big win, as shown in FIG. Up to 4 minutes is considered to be a chance for a small hit rush. However, even in such a case, if the big hit 1, 2 (latency win probability win) is won, it will be transferred to the latent status again (small hit rush in FIG. 4, FIG. 6) (See the dotted line frame of), substantially, small hit rush will be continued.

(Positive variation state → small hit game, lost → definite variation state)
During the definite change state, as described above, most of the gaming balls heading for the lower large winning opening 50 on the downstream side are picked up by the electric chew, and the lower large winning opening 50 is not substantially winning. In addition, when the small figure in the special figure 2 "very long fluctuation pattern (600 seconds)" is selected, it becomes a situation where small hit game is difficult to occur. Therefore, the above "small hit rush" does not occur (line L10, line L11). In the case of the present embodiment, in the “probable change state”, winnings to the right starting opening 33 frequently occur, but the number of winning balls is one, that is, even if winning to the right starting opening 33, the net increase number is 0, In addition, small hit game is difficult to occur under the situation, since the winning of the lower large winning opening 50 almost does not occur, the balls are not increased, basically, the ball of the player is slightly reduced or maintain the current state While the game is progressing (the base value of the electric chew winning under the electric support state is 100% or less). In addition, during the definite change state, it is substantially continued until the next big hit winning (ST specified number of times 65535), the player, expecting the big hit in the positive change state to be a big hit that becomes a transition opportunity to the latent state While playing games.

(Time saving state → small hit game, lost → time saving state)
It is put under the game situation of the same event as the definite change state during the "time saving state" (it hardly gets a prize in the lower large winning opening 50, "the super long fluctuation pattern" is selected in the small hit of the special figure 2) There is no hit rush (line L13, line L14). In addition, since the time saving state ends in 7 or 50 times and the state is shifted to the normal state (line L15, L20), the player is a big hit when the big hit in the time saving state becomes a transition trigger to the latent state. Will be playing games with hopes.

(Big wins during Latency, Probability, or Shortening)
When a jackpot is won in a latent state, a definite change state, or a short time state (lines L9, L12, L16), a hit effect and a big hit game are started according to the big hit type. In the drawing, as an example, an example is shown in which the “second battle bonus” is started as a jackpot game in the continuous state. In this second battle bonus, as in the first battle bonus, a "battle effect" is disclosed that conceals the jackpot type that has been won this time. However, the battle effect of the second battle bonus is different from the battle effect of the first battle bonus. Here, even if any jackpot is won, the battle effect is developed, and during the round game of the (final round) to the ending effect, the jackpot type which is won this time is announced as a result effect of the battle effect. In other words, it is informed whether to be transitioned to the latent state, the definite change state, or the short time state. Specifically, in the case of "big hit 1, 2, 5," which triggers transition to the latent state, a blessing effect is announced that informs small hit rush (transition to latent state), and "big hit 3, In the case of “6, 7”, a chance effect is announced to inform the probability change entry (transition to a probability change status), and in the case of “big hit 4 or 8”, the challenge effect to notify a short time entry (transition to time saving status) Appeared as a result of battle production. After the big hit game, depending on the type of the big hit which is won this time, it is shifted to the specified game state (line L17-L19).

(Time saving state → normal state)
By the way, when ending the time saving state and returning to the normal state, it is considered that in many cases, the number of actuation reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (special figure 2 actuation reserved ball) is present.

  During the time saving state, winning of the right starting opening 33 frequently occurs due to the function of the electric chow support function. For this reason, at the time of short-time digestion, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 operation holding ball is present. In addition, there is a possibility that the game ball which is thrown without winning in the right starting opening 33 for Special Drawing 1 may win in the lower right starting opening 35 for Special Drawing 2 on the downstream side, and is awarded in the lower right starting opening 35 Then, the special figure 2 side fluctuation is also started. The special figure 2 side fluctuation during the short time state is such that the super long fluctuation pattern of 600 seconds is selected at the time of the miss and the small hit (other than the column of “normal / probability change / time short” in FIG. Mid 10 minutes fluctuation 1 to 6 reference), the time until one special figure 2 actuation reserving ball is digested is very long, so when special time saving, special figure 2 actuation reserving ball also exists, or It is highly likely that Special Figure 2 is in motion.

  Under such gaming conditions, when leaving the time saving state and transitioning to the normal state, as for the main effect, the special figure 1 side is the "table fluctuation state" as in the time saving state, and the other special figure 2 side is It is in the "backward movement state" (see FIG. 7 (b), FIG. 31E). Temporarily, when leaving the time saving state, if the special figure 2 operation holding balls are accumulated up to the maximum of 4 and there is a big hit election hold in it, the fluctuation pattern concerning the special figure 2 in the normal state is In order to prevent strategic strikes, a super long fluctuation pattern of 600 seconds (10 minutes fluctuation other than latency 1 to 6) is selected when losing and small hits, and a long fluctuation pattern of 240 seconds even if it is a big hit (normal The middle four minutes) is selected (see the normal column in FIG. 36 and the normal column in FIG. 34). Assuming that the big hit selection is the second hold, except for the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 currently in process, the waiting time (until the fluctuation display of the second big hit selection suspension is stopped), approximately 14 If it takes about minutes (one operation hold ball fluctuation time 10 minutes + big hit selection fluctuation time 4 minutes) and the big hit selection is the 4th hold, the waiting time will be longer, about 34 minutes It will also take (about three operation pending ball fluctuation time 30 minutes + big hit winning fluctuation fluctuation time 4 minutes) degree.

  Therefore, there are many players who quit the game without noticing that the special figure 2 is in motion among the players. Of course, even if the player quits playing the game, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is carried out as it is, so a big hit will occur if the symbol variation display game (big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2) related to the big hit win hold is over. (Subsequent condition device operation flag ON), then, until the game ball passes through the team gate 57, the substantial big hit game (round game) is not started, it is put under “round game start waiting state” It is eaten. Under such circumstances, if the special figure 2 reports that a big hit has occurred in the dark cloud under the reverse fluctuation state without taking any measures, the following problems occur.

  Even though no one is playing a game, the data counter DT starts the jackpot notification (the above-mentioned jackpot notification function), giving the surrounding players a sense of distrust and discomfort. In addition, there is a risk that players who confirmed that the data counter DT is reporting a big hit, but no one is in the game stand, may be haunted by hiena acts such as securing the table, and the players and the hall side It may cause trouble between players. Therefore, it is preferable not to execute the jackpot notification by the data counter DT at least until the gaming ball passes through the commercial gate 57 when the jackpot is hit.

(First hit: at the time of the jackpot winning in the normal state)
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "big hit medium signal" of the outer end signal indicating that the big hit is being played is output from the frame external terminal board 21 at the timing described below. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 32A is a time chart showing the output timing of the jackpot medium signal when the jackpot is won in the normal state.

  The above-mentioned "big hit in the middle signal" is output triggered by special item stopped by the big hit symbol and the condition continuous operation device is activated (condition continuous operation device ON flag ON) after the condition device operation (after the condition device operation flag ON) Be done. The condition device operation flag is a flag specifying whether or not a big hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is in progress, and the flag is in an OFF state ( In the case of = 00H), it indicates that a big hit is not being played. Further, the above-mentioned "character product continuous operation device operation flag" is a flag for specifying the operation state of the character product continuous operation device, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the character continuous operation device It indicates that the game is in operation (round game can be continued), and if the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the bonus product continuous operation device is not in operation (round game can not be continued). The bonus product continuous operation device operation flag is set to ON when the bonus gate sensor 57a detects a game ball in the special electric symbol management process (step S095 in FIG. 13) described later, and the big hit game is over When set to the OFF state.

  Specifically, with reference to FIG. 32 (A), the main control unit 20 stops displaying the special symbol (here, the special figure 1) related to the big hit, and a predetermined determined display time (time t0 to time t1) has elapsed. If a big hit occurs (after time t1 (condition device operation flag is ON)), the game does not output a signal during the big hit until the gaming ball is detected by the combination gate sensor 57a, but the game is performed by the combination gate sensor 57a In response to the detection of the ball (triggered by the item continuous operation device operation flag ON), the jackpot signal is output (time ta). And although illustration is not carried out, when a big hit game is complete | finished (when the round game of the prescription | regulation number of rounds is complete | finished), an output is stopped. In addition, the above-mentioned "fixed display time" is a margin time width for informing the stop display mode of the special symbol after the fluctuation time of the special symbol is over, and when this fixed display time passes, it is to the next processing It is possible to shift (see step S 482 in FIG. 24 described later, step S 492 in FIG. 25, and steps S 502 and S 508 in FIG. 26).

  Here, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot has occurred, before the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, even if the combination gate sensor 57a detects the game ball, the detection signal is treated as invalid. A “detection invalid period (time t1 to t2)” is provided. This detection invalid period (combine gate effective waiting time) is used as an effecting time width for making "right-turning instruction effect 135 (see FIG. 31A described later)" appear as a part of the hit effect. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the linking gate 57 during this detection invalid period, the round game is not started, and the jackpot signal is not output (see time te).

  However, after the detection invalid period (combination gate effective waiting time) has elapsed (after time t2), the detection of the gaming ball by the combination gate sensor 57a is activated (see "combination gate" in the figure). Therefore, when the combination gate sensor 57a detects a game ball during this effective period, a signal indicating a large hit is output (time ta) and after a predetermined interval time (for example, 20 ms) elapses, a round game is It is to be started (time tb).

  Thereby, at the time of the first hit, it is possible not to execute the big hit notification by the data counter DT at least until the game ball passes through the combination gate 57. In particular, it is possible to prevent the sudden big hit notification by the data counter DT from being executed when the special figure 2 side is in the reverse fluctuation state. Also, at the time of the first hit, no fluctuation shortening signal is output, and the data counter DT is a big hit medium signal based on the fact that the "variation shortening signal" output to the time saving state, the probability changing state or the latent state is not received. Even if it receives, it can be judged that this big hit is not the big hit in consecutive villas, but the first hit.

(When in a row (when the jackpot wins in the latencies, shorts, or odds))
Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned "big hit medium signal", the above "variable time big hit medium signal" of the outer end signal indicating big hit game in progress is outputted from the frame external terminal board 21; As for the middle signal, the special symbol time-shorting function is activated (during the special symbol time-shorting state flag is on) during the big hit game (when the condition device operating flag is on). That is, the variable time jackpot medium signal is output at the start of the jackpot winning during the latent state, the short time state, or the definite change state.

  FIG. 32B is a time chart showing the output timing of the jackpot signal during variation when the jackpot is won during the latent state, as an example of the gaming state under special symbol time function operation. Note that the description of the same content as that in FIG. 32A is appropriately omitted to avoid repeated description.

  The above-mentioned "change-time jackpot middle signal" is output during the condition device operation (during the condition device operation flag ON) and is output during the item continuous operation device operation (during the item continuous operation device operation flag ON). Specifically, referring to FIG. 32 (B), the main control unit 20 stops the special symbol (here, the special figure 2) relating to the big hit, and the timing when the big hit at time t1 occurs (condition device operation flag ON At the time of fluctuation) the jackpot medium signal is output. Then, similar to the jackpot signal, the output is stopped when the round game of the maximum number of rounds is finished (not shown).

  The data counter DT is configured to start a big hit notification when it receives a big hit medium signal or a variable big hit medium signal. That is, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the case of “first hit (big hit in the normal state)” and “at continuous state (in the case of the present embodiment, positive change state, latent state, or time reduction state) In the case of the jackpot win), the start timing of the jackpot notification by the data counter DT can be made different. Specifically, at the time of continuous shooting, it precedes the time of first hit and outputs an outer end signal capable of specifying that the condition device is in operation during the big hit game, in other words.

  More specifically, when a big hit occurs, the signal during the big hit is not output during the first hit (the big hit in the normal state) (see FIG. 32A), the above-mentioned big hit middle signal Since only the data is output, the data counter DT receives the signal during the big hit and starts big hit notification. Therefore, on the data counter DT side, the occurrence of the big hit on the gaming machine 1 alone does not start the big hit notification, but waits for the game ball passage to the combination gate 57 to start the big hit notification. On the other hand, in the continuous mode (at the big hit other than in the normal state), since the "variable big hit middle hit signal" is output prior to the above-mentioned big hit middle signal, the data counter DT side Prior to the game ball passing to the gate 57, that is, the jackpot notification is started with the jackpot start of the gaming machine 1 side. In addition, at the time of combination gate 57 passing, the big hit medium signal is output, but because data counter DT side has already received the big hit medium signal when it fluctuates and has already started big hit notification, the big hit due to the big hit medium signal Notification is not performed.

  As described above, when the start timing of the big hit notification by the data counter DT is different between the case of the first hit and the case of the consecutive units, the player is distrusted in the case of the first hit, etc. It is necessary to start the big hit notification by the data counter DT at the time of passing through the combination gate (when the item interlocking device is ON) from the viewpoint of preventing the above-mentioned problem of It is extremely rare to quit the game, and there is no problem if you start the big hit notification immediately when the big hit occurs (the timing of the condition device operation flag ON), and with the time of the big hit, Is preferably reported correctly (see FIGS. 31A to 31G described later).

  In the case of the data counter DT capable of determining the first hit time and the continuous time based on the fluctuation shortening signal and the big hit and middle signal, it may be configured not to output the big hit and middle hit signal. Specifically, on the data counter DT side, when the fluctuation shortening signal is received (ON edge detection), the current gaming state involves the operation of the special view time short function (in the case of this embodiment, the time short state, the probability change state, Or grasp that it is a latent condition). On the other hand, on the gaming machine side, when a big hit occurs during the gaming state with the special feature time short function activated, the output of the fluctuation shortening signal is stopped (the time short function does not operate during the big hit), and the big hit immediately thereafter The medium signal is output (see the broken line portion of the large hitting medium signal in FIG. 32 (B)). Using such an output form, on the data counter DT side, after receiving the special symbol determination signal during the gaming state with the special view time short function activated, the OFF edge of the current special view fluctuation shortening signal is detected. In addition, when the ON edge of the jackpot medium signal is detected, it can be determined that the jackpot is a jackpot at the time of consecutive units. Of course, as long as it is possible to output any of signals during fluctuation, big hit, middle hit, middle hit, and fluctuation shortening signal, it can also correspond to the data counter described above, and it also supports various data counters DT. It is possible to provide a possible gaming machine.

  Although details will be described later, when the current big hit in the normal state is the big hit (big hit 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 side and the big hit of the special figure 2 side, the big hit start of the gaming machine 1 side The effects (big hit start effects (opening effects)) are different (see FIGS. 31A to 31G described later). In other words, when the big hit of this time is the big hit on the special figure 1 side (special figure 1 big hit) under the special figure 1 table fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state), the current big hit is the special figure 1 table In the case of a big hit (special figure 2 back big hit) on the special figure 2 side under the fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state), the big hit start rendition is different. As a result, by applying measures to the hit effect as well, it is possible to effectively prevent giving discomfort to the surroundings and also to effectively prevent the hyena act.

(For specific examples of the effects of the gaming machine 1 side and the data counter DT side: FIGS. 31A to 31G)
31A to 31G show an example of effect on the side of the gaming machine 1 according to the game situation and an example of effect on the side of the data counter DT. 31A to 31G mainly show the image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36 and the effect contents of the light effect by the decoration lamp 45 (the surrounding LED 45) as the effect mode on the gaming machine 1 side.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the case of any of the normal state, the probability change state, and the time saving state, the symbol variation display game 1 according to the special figure 1 is the main effect (special figure 1 table variation state) Make it appear as In the case of the latent state, the symbol variation display game 2 according to the special figure 2 is made to appear as a main effect (special figure 2 table variation state). Therefore, depending on what kind of gaming state, and what kind of jackpot was won, the presentation during the big hit game may be different.

(Specific example at the time of first hit: FIG. 31A to FIG. 31B)
31A to 31B, the transition of the effect contents (the screen of the liquid crystal display 36 and the effect contents of the decoration lamp 45) on the side of the gaming machine 1 at the first hit and the effect contents of the data counter DT at the big hit (DT side Shows the transition of the jackpot notification mode of In FIG. 31A to FIG. 31B, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, the number of special drawing 1 operation holding balls is three, and the number of special drawing 2 operation holding balls is zero. On the side of the symbol variation display game 1 wins a big hit, and the big hit is the first big hit after the opening of the hall (here, 634 turns from the opening time, the big hit 1 The case where it is assumed that) has been won is representatively shown. That is, the present big hit is the case of the big hit on the side of the special figure 1 under the special figure 1 table fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state) (special figure 1 table big hit).

  FIG. 31A (1) shows an example of effect at the time of the first hit. Referring to FIG. 31A (1), the symbol variation display game 1 according to the special figure 1 is displayed as a main effect (effect under the normal effect mode) in the liquid crystal screen (special figure 1 table variation state, particularly Figure 2 back fluctuation state), in the lower left corner, as a sub effect (sub display area) different from the main effect, a dedicated display area 160 for the number of reserved for special symbols 1 and 2 and the presence or absence of variable display, It is shown by four small squares. In the drawing, the dedicated display area 160 is shown exaggeratingly, and the actual screen occupancy of the dedicated display area 160 is lower than that in the drawing. Further, the reception mark J of the display area 78 during fluctuation and the suspension K during the game execution are omitted.

  Of the four squares pertaining to this dedicated display area 160, the upper left square is the first number-of-retentions display area 156 for displaying the special figure 1 operation pending ball count, and the upper right square is the variable figure of special figure 1 It is a first variation presence / absence display area 157 for displaying whether or not Also, the lower left side is the second reserved number display area 158 for displaying the special figure 2 operation reserved ball number, and the lower right side is for displaying whether or not the special figure 2 is in a variable display mode. It is a fluctuation presence / absence display area 159. In the first hold count display area 156 and the second hold count display area 158, the hold count is indicated by Arabic numerals, and in the first change presence / absence display area 157 and the second change presence / absence display area 159, "変 動It shows with "" and it shows with "X" that the symbol is stopping. In FIG. 31A (1), the special figure 1 operating ball number “3”, the special figure 1 is in the fluctuating state “⇔”, the special figure 2 operating ball number “0”, the special figure 2 is not changing state “X” It is ". In addition, regarding the display of the first fluctuation presence / absence display area 157 and the second fluctuation presence / absence display area 159, “X” indicates a lost symbol, “Δ” indicates a small hit symbol, and “o” indicates a stopped display condition in the big hit symbol . Therefore, when one of these "X", "[Delta]" and "O" is displayed, it indicates that the special symbol is in a non-varying state.

  The images displayed in the first fluctuation presence / absence display area 157 and the second fluctuation presence / absence display area 159 indicate whether or not the special display 1 and the special drawing 2 are being displayed in a variable manner, and are different from the three decorative symbols. The fourth symbol of the symbol is referred to as the "fourth symbol" of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and in some cases, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 side is "the decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol" or the "fourth symbol 157 The fourth symbol on the side of the special figure 2 is also referred to as “decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol” or “fourth symbol 159”. The dedicated display area 160 has four display areas 156 to 159 regardless of whether it is a special figure 1 table fluctuation state, a special figure 1 back fluctuation state, a special figure 2 table fluctuation state, or a special figure 2 back fluctuation state. The content of the is to be displayed.

  In FIG. 31A (1), when the big hit variation (symbol variation display game 1) of the special figure 1 ends, the combination of the decorative symbols (decor pattern 131) related to the type of the big hit is stopped. Here, in the symbol variation display game 1 on the side of the special figure 1 which is the main effect, "777 (small hit rush decision symbol)" showing the winning of "big hit 1 (which is usually a low probability hit big hit)" is stopped and displayed An example is shown. However, in the drawing, the stage of the state immediately before the finalized display of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is shown, and "777" of the decorative symbol 131 is in the temporary stop display state (swing fluctuation) just before the finalized display. The display contents of the special effect display area 160 for sub-effects are: special figure 1 actuation ball number "3", special figure 1 (fourth symbol 157) in fluctuating state "⇔", special figure 2 actuation ball number "0" The special figure 2 (the fourth symbol 159) is in the non-varying state (the lost symbol stop display state) "X".

  After that, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 ends (after the definite display time elapses), and the big hit occurs. As a result, the display content of the exclusive display area 160 in FIG. 31A (2) is the special figure 1 operation pending ball number “3”, the special figure 1 (fourth symbol 157) is not changed (big hit symbol stop state) “ 」”, Special figure 2 operation reservation ball number “0”, special figure 2 (the 4th design 159) becomes non fluctuation state (the lost design stop state) “X”. Since the special symbol variation display game (variation of the special drawing) is not executed during the big hit game, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 does not change until the big hit game is over.

  FIG. 31A (2) shows the gaming situation on the gaming machine side 1 (liquid crystal screen, decoration lamp 45) and the data counter DT side at the start of the big hit game.

  On the gaming machine side 1, as part of the hit effect, a large "big hit" message is displayed at the center of the screen, and a big hit start effect 132 for lighting the decoration lamp 45 (ambient LED 45) in a rainbow color appears. In addition to the jackpot start effect 132, a right-handed instruction effect 135 for instructing "right-handed" is revealed. The big hit start effect 132 and the right strike instruction effect 135 appear until "combination gate effective waiting time (for example, 5 seconds)" until the combination gate sensor 57a is activated has elapsed. In addition, “777” of the decorative symbol (decorative stop symbol) 131 is displayed with a small retraction at the upper left corner, and it is displayed what combination of decorative symbols the current big hit has stopped. In addition, in the per-hit effect, effects corresponding to the game state at the time of winning and the type of hit are produced.

  Also, at this stage, the big hit / medium signal is not output (see time t1 in FIG. 32A), and as shown in FIG. 32 (2), the big hit notification by the data counter DT is not performed (light emitting portion DTa in the figure). Normally, the display contents of the data counter DT are not updated. Therefore, the display content of the data counter DT in FIG. 31A (2) is that the display value of the big hit count display section DTd (hereinafter abbreviated as “big hit count DTd”) is zero, the display value of the start count display section DTb (hereinafter “start count DTb "Abbreviated" is "634", the display value of the total rotation number display portion DTc (hereinafter abbreviated as "total rotation number DTb") is "634", the display value of the continuous rotation number display portion DTe (hereinafter "automatic rotation number DTe" "Abbreviated" is zero.

  Then, when the winning combination gate effective waiting time (5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 31B (3), a gate instructing to aim the winning combination gate 57 (a designation to cause the winning combination gate 57 to pass the game ball). A winning instruction effect 137 is produced. Here, a message of “Aim at the gate!” And an arrow image appear as the gate winning instruction effect 137.

(On the appearance of the right-handed instruction effect 135 → gate winning instruction effect 137)
Here, in the present embodiment, at the start of the big hit, the instruction to aim for the commercial gate 57 is given first, after instructing to hit the commercial gate 57 in advance, instead of instructing to aim for the commercial gate 57 in advance. (After the right hitting instruction effect 135 is revealed, the gate winning instruction effect 137 is revealed). The reason is as follows.

  If a jackpot is started and it is instructed to aim for the gate 57 immediately, in the case of a game beginner, it does not know where the gate 57 is located and right-hits whether to strike left It is also assumed that the game ball is hit appropriately without knowing the game player. In the case of the present embodiment, since the bonus gate 57 is formed on the right downflow path 3c side, if the player strikes the left, the profit of the player is lost. In view of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, first, after giving a right-handed instruction in advance (right-handed instruction effect 135 appears for a predetermined time), an instruction to aim at combination gate 57 is issued (gate winning instruction effect) 137), etc. "kind instruction effect" appears.

  Then, when the player passes the game ball to the combination gate 57 in accordance with the gate winning instruction effect 137, the bonus continuous actuation device operates (a bonus continuous actuation device flag ON), and the frame external terminal board 21 A big hit or middle signal is output from (see time ta in FIG. 32A). Then, after the elapse of a predetermined interval time (for example, 20 ms), the first round game (opening of the big winning opening 40 for big hit) is started (see time tb in FIG. 32A).

  FIG. 31B (4) shows the effects of the game machine 1 and the data counter DT when the game ball passes through the combination gate 57. On the gaming machine 1 side, the effect during the round 139 is started at the start of the round game. In the production during the round 139, other than the animation display of the aliens coming off the disc and the message of "Aim for the top attacker" instructing the winning of the big winning opening 40 for the big hit, the current number of rounds and winning A notification effect 130 or the like indicating the number of balls is revealed.

  On the data counter DT side, upon receiving a big hit or middle signal, the light emitting part DTa is caused to emit light in a rainbow color or the like, unique big hit notification is started, and the display content of the data counter is updated. As for the display contents of the data counter, since the big hit number DTd is the first hit time, it is updated to a value obtained by adding 1 to the present big hit (1 big hit number, 0 consecutive number due to the present big hit). Although not shown, when the current big hit game is over, the big hit medium signal is turned OFF, and the data counter DT returns the value of the start number DTb to zero assuming that the big hit is over.

(Example of effect during small hit rush (under latent condition): FIG. 31C)
After the big hit game by the big hit 1 described in FIG. 31C is finished, the game enters a latent state (see FIG. 4). FIG. 31C (5) shows the ending effect according to the big hit 1 (normal latency certain hit), and FIGS. 31C, 31D (6) to (8) show an example of the effect during the latent state.

  The ending effect is effect contents for notifying information about the gaming state to be shifted after the big hit ends, and an ending effect corresponding to the big hit type appears. In the present example, since the case of winning the jackpot 1 is described, the ending effect 175 is effect content notifying that transition to the latent state (small hit rush) is made. In FIG. 31C (5), an image of an alien and a message of “Alian Abduction Rush” indicating that the state is a low probability state (small hit rush) are included.

  When the big hit game by the big hit 1 ends and the ending effect 175 ends, the gaming state is shifted to the latent state. In the latent state, the special figure 2 surface fluctuation state (special figure 1 back fluctuation state), and the symbol fluctuation display game 2 according to the special figure 2 is the production under the main effect (latency effect mode (small hitting rush effect mode) Displayed as).

  FIG. 31C (6) shows an example of effect when the game ball is won in the small hit lower winning opening 50 for small hit in the small hit game in the latent effect production mode (small hit rush production mode).

  The increase effect 180 shown in FIG. 31C (6) reports (displays) the number of acquired balls (the number of winning balls for the lower large winning opening 50) which is added to the number of acquired balls every time the lower large winning opening 50 is won. At the same time, it is an effect content that reports the accumulated value of the current acquired ball number in real time. In addition, the current number of acquired balls is such that the total number of acquired balls from the time of the first hit to the end of continuous shooting (transition to the normal state) is displayed in real time (see FIG. 31E (12) described later). .

  The increase effect 180 displays an acquired ball number notification effect 177 for notifying the current acquired ball number (approximate value), and an acquired ball number to be added to the current acquired ball number every time the lower large winning opening 50 is won. The additional ball number notification effect 178, the abduction effect 179 in which the number of winnings is notified by the character image, and the like are included. In addition, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31C (6) are the special figure 1 operation pending ball number “2”, the special figure 1 (fourth symbol 157) in the fluctuation state “⇔”, special figure 2 operation pending The number of balls "4" and the special figure 2 (the fourth symbol 159) are in the non-variable state (small hitting symbol stop display mode) "Δ".

  The effect example of FIG. 31C (6) shows a case in which two gaming balls are successively won while the lower large winning opening 50 is opened by the small hit game. When a winning occurs while the lower large winning opening 50 is open, a numeric image of "+10" is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal screen by the addition ball number notification effect 178, and this numeric image is displayed, The count value (currently acquired ball number) of the acquired ball number notification effect 177 is updated and displayed. Since the current count value is "Total 2180" (the number of obtained 2180 shots), the count value increases by "+10" in the order of "Total 2190" → "Total 2200". In addition, in the abduction effect 179, one cow image 179a is displayed for each winning, and an effect image expressing that it can be taken away by a disk is displayed.

  31C (7) and 31C (6), the difference between the increase effect 180 is changed to a number image (emphasis number image 176) in which the number image of "+10" by the addition sphere number notification effect 178 is bordered in a predetermined color The point is that the character image 179b of the girl is displayed in addition to the cow image 179a in the abduction effect 179.

  The emphasizing numeral image 176 is an aspect of the pre-read advance notice effect, and is an effect mode that indicates the expected in-hold probability of winning within the existing operation pending ball whether or not there is a jackpot pending presence. This emphasized number image (additional sphere number notification effect) 176 indicates the high or low of the expectation of winning within the hold due to the difference of the border color. For example, the read-ahead of "acquired sphere number display system" is changed to a normal white (figure image of FIG. 31C (6)), special outline color such as green, red, rainbow color etc. It can be a preview effect. Here, the green, red, and iridescent border colors indicate that in order of this color, the expectation for winning within the hold is high, and in particular, the rainbow border is that there is a big hit winning reserve within the hold. Is a definite indicator (pending on hold). Note that by changing the display mode of the number image, it may be suggested that the degree of expectation of winning within the reserve be high or low. For example, a numeric image represented by Arabic numerals (“+10”), Chinese numerals (“+10”), Roman numerals (“+ X”), etc. is provided, suggesting that the probability of winning in-hold is high in this order. Can.

  In addition, the character image 179b is also one mode of prefetched notice effect, and when there is an on-hold winning hold, it indicates the "winning type expected degree" of what kind of winning type it is, for example, FIG. 31C (7). The character image 179b of the girl shown is a notice image (specific big hit high expectation degree advance preview effect) which suggests that the expectation of the high probability big hit (big hit 5) in which the small hit rush continues is high. In the present embodiment, in addition to the character images 179a and 179b, a plurality of types of character images are prepared, and depending on what character image appears, the expectation of the latency probability probability hit (big hit 5) Suggested degree of expectation, degree of latency, probability variation big hit (big hit 6, 7), latency of short time big hit (big hit 8). Specifically, in the case of the boy's character image (not shown), it is possible to confirm that the latency time short / big hit (big hit 8) is relatively higher than the other big hits in the case of the cow image 179a. If the time-constant variation big hit (big hit 6, 7) has a relatively higher expectation than the other big hits, in the case of the girl character image 179b, the latency time big hit (big hit 5) is relative to the other big hits. It is reported that the degree of expectation is high (may be accurate). The appearance rates of the various character images described above may be different from each other or may be the same, and can be determined as appropriate. However, it is preferable that the girl's character image is positioned as a premium effect that provides a small hit rush continuous notification, and that the appearance rate is relatively lower than that of other character images.

  In the case of the present embodiment, whether or not there is a big hit selection hold in the existing operation holding balls by the highlighted numeral image 176 and the character image displayed by the abduction effect 179, if there is a big hit selection hold It is possible to give an estimation element as to what kind of winning type it is, by the representation of the acquired ball number display system during the small hit rush. As a result, the effects during a small hit rush become colorful, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Modification of production during small hit rush)
In the added sphere number notification effects 176 and 178 of FIG. 31C (6) and (7), the numeral image of “+10” is displayed each time there is a prize, but the display mode can be as follows. For example, if there is a prize in the lower large winning opening 50 during one small hit game, "+10" is displayed for the first prize, and "+20" is displayed for the second prize. In the case of the third winning, “+30” may be displayed, and in the case of the fourth winning, “+40” may be displayed (cumulative display type addition ball number notification effect). Then, the final value (here, +40) is added to the current value of the acquired ball number notification effect 177 to update the acquired ball number.

  Further, the contents of the effect of the added ball number notification effect may be changed according to the current number of acquired balls. For example, when the current acquisition ball number (total acquisition ball number) is 10000 or less, the cumulative display type addition ball number notification effect of the above-mentioned modification is used, and when it exceeds 10000, the above FIG. 7) Add ball number notification effect.

  In addition, the above-described increase effect 180 (at least one effect of 176 to 179) may be used to make it possible to notify (suggest) the lottery result on the back fluctuation side. For example, when the special figure 1 in the back fluctuation side is in the big hit winning state (during the big hit fluctuation) during the latent state in which the special figure 2 becomes the surface fluctuation, the numeric image 176 or 178 The side shows the meaning of the jackpot) etc.

  In addition, increase production 180 is the contents of a production which announces the number of balls etc. which are acquired in consecutive villas. Therefore, not only during small hit rush (during latent state, small hit rush production mode), but also during time saving state (during short time rendering mode) or positive change state (during probability change production mode) any gaming state (rendering mode) ) Can also be made to appear. In addition, during a specific gaming state (for example, in the probability variation state (during the probability variation production mode) and / or the time reduction status (during the time reduction production mode)), a highlighted numeric image (additional ball number notification production effect) showing the expected in-hold win ) And / or the character image 179a, b may not be revealed.

(A concrete example at the time of twins: Fig. 31D)
Next, with reference to FIG. 31D, an example of effects on the side of the gaming machine 1 and on the side of the data counter DT in the “when connected” will be described. FIG. 31D shows that, in FIG. 31A described above, after winning in jackpot 1 in the normal state and shifting to the latent state, when winning "big hit 8 (latency hourly junior high)" in the latent state The transition of the presentation content (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 and the presentation content of the decoration lamp 45) of the gaming machine 1 and the transition of the presentation content (big hit notification mode on the DT side) of the data counter DT at the time of the big hit It is. That is, FIG. 31D is a case of the big hit (special figure 2 table big hit) of the special figure 2 side under the special figure 2 table fluctuation state (special figure 1 back fluctuation state) this big hit. 31D to 31 G described below, substantially the same components as those of FIGS. 31A to 31 B are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the details thereof are appropriately omitted to avoid repeated description. Do.

  FIG. 31D (8) shows an example of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 when the player wins a big hit (here, the big hit 8) in the lottery on the side of the special figure 2 during the latent state. In the example shown in FIGS. 31D (8) to (10), the number of the special figure 1 operation holding balls accumulated in the normal state is consumed by 1 and there are two holdings. In the situation where the number of the maximum is four, showing the presentation example of the case that was won in the big hit 8 (latency time short hit) in the symbol variation display game 2 of the special figure 2 side at 140 rotations from the previous big hit It is

  31D (8), in the liquid crystal screen, the symbol variation display game 2 according to the special figure 2 is displayed as the main effect (effect under the latent effect mode) (special figure 1 back fluctuation state, The special display area 160 is displayed at the lower left corner of the special figure 2 table fluctuation state). In the same figure, when the hit variation (design variation display game 2) of the special figure 2 is finished, the decoration symbol 138 is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols related to the type of the big hit. Here, in the symbol variation display game 2 of the special figure 2 side which is the main effect, an example is shown in which “222 (time short jackpot corresponding symbol)” showing the win is shown stopped to “big hit 8” which is the latency time short hit. ing. However, in the drawing, the stage of the state immediately before the finalized display of the fluctuation display of the special view 2 is shown, and “222” of the decorative symbol 138 is in the temporary stop display state (swing fluctuation) just before the finalized display. Therefore, the display contents of the exclusive display area 160 in FIG. 31D (8) are: special figure 1 operation pending ball number "2", special figure 1 (fourth symbol 157) in a fluctuating state "⇔", special figure 2 operation pending ball The number "4" and the special figure 2 (fourth symbol 159) are in the fluctuating state "wrinkle". Here, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are changing in parallel.

  After that, the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2 ends (decided display time progress), the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (the 4th design 157) which was in the fluctuation state in parallel is forced to stop by the lost design (forced lost design) Displayed, a big hit occurs. As a result, the display content of the exclusive display area 160 in FIG. 31D (9) is “2” in the special drawing 1 operation holding ball number, and the special drawing 1 is in the non-fluctuation state (lost symbol stop state) “X”, special drawing 2 The action reserved ball number "4", the special figure 2 becomes a non-variation state (big hit symbol stop state) "o".

  FIG. 31D (9) shows the liquid crystal screen at the start of the big hit game and the effect situation on the data counter DT side. On the gaming machine 1 side, while outputting a signal during a big hit during fluctuation, an opening effect (big hit start effect) is started. On the liquid crystal screen, as a part of the opening effect, a message of "big hit" is displayed on the flag background image of Asahi Day, and a big hit start effect 132 for lighting the decoration lamp 45 (peripheral LED 45) in a rainbow color appears. In addition to the jackpot start effect 132, a right-handed instruction effect 135 for instructing "right-handed" is revealed.

  Also, on the data counter DT side, upon receiving the time-change big hit medium signal, the light emitting part DTa emits light in rainbow color to start big hit notification, and the display content of the data counter DT is updated. As for the display contents of the data counter, the number of big hits DTd and the number of consecutive homes DTe are updated to a value obtained by adding 1 to the current big hit (two large hits, one number of consecutive homes resulting from the current big hit) . Therefore, the display content of the data counter DT in FIG. 31D (9) is that the number of big hits DTd is “2”, the number of consecutive houses DTe is “1”, the number of starts DTb is “140”, and the total number of revolutions DTc is “774 (previous The total of 634 rotations + the current 140 rotations (774 rotations). Unlike in the case of the first hit, the jackpot notification by the data counter DT is started before the game ball passes to the combination gate 57, unlike the first hit.

  Then, when the winning combination gate effective waiting time (5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 31D (10), a gate winning instruction rendering effect 137 appears on the liquid crystal screen. When the game ball passes through the gate 57, a round game is started and an effect (not shown) is generated during the round. It should be noted that when the game ball passes through the gate 57, the big hit medium signal is output, but the data counter DT side has already started the big hit notification in response to the "change-time big hit medium signal" Therefore, the jackpot notification caused by the jackpot signal is not executed (re-execution does not have any problem). Then, when the current big hit game is over, the variable time big hit medium signal is turned OFF, and the data counter DT returns the value of the start number DTb to zero assuming that the big hit is over.

(Big hit game end → time saving state → normal state: Figure 31E)
After the big hit game by the big hit 8 described in FIG. 31D is finished, the system enters into the time saving state B (7 times short time) (see FIG. 4). FIG. 31E (11) shows the ending effect according to the big hit 8 (latency time short hit), and FIGS. 31E (12) to (14) show the transition of the contents of the effect after the shift from the time saving state to the normal state. is there.

  The ending effect 143 is effect contents for notifying of the transition to the time saving state and the number of remaining time shortenings. In FIG. 31E (11), a short shift notification image 141 including an image of a disk and a missionary message of “chance mode entry! Search for a disk” and a short notification image 142 including a “7 more times” message It has become.

  As the big hit game with the big hit 8 ends, the ending effect 143 ends, and the gaming state is shifted to the short time state. Although not illustrated, in the time saving state, the special figure 1 table fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state), the symbol variation display game 1 according to the special figure 1 is the main effect (effect by the time reduction effect mode under) It will be displayed as Further, the dedicated display area 160 is displayed at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal screen, as in the normal state, the latent state, and the like.

  FIG. 31E (12) shows an example of the liquid crystal screen at the start of the normal state (the first game after the completion of the short time state) after leaving the short time state. In FIG. 31E (12), reference numeral 146 indicates a result effect. Generally, this result effect is effect content including information indicating that the time saving state is ended due to the current fluctuation (i.e., transition to a normal state), information on the number of acquired balls obtained in a series of consecutive units, and the like. Therefore, the "result effect" is usually an effect to be produced in the symbol variation display game of the final round (in the present example, the seventh turn of the final variation) in which the time saving state ends.

  However, in the present embodiment, due to the simultaneous fluctuation type and its playability etc., in the "time-saving state", as the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss of the special figure 1, the ultra high speed fluctuation pattern of 1 second 1s) is selected (see FIG. 35 (b)). For this reason, at the seventh rotation of the final change, the presentation time width of the result presentation can not be secured.

  Therefore, during the time saving state, the result effect is produced in the first rotation after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state without making the result effect appear. In the "normal state", a variation pattern of at least 4 seconds can be selected. Therefore, in consideration of the fact that the variation pattern of the shortest 4 seconds (normal variation 4 s) is selected, the effect time width of the result effect itself is set as the effect scenario configuration that falls within 4 seconds. Of course, the above result effect may be revealed in the symbol variation display game in which the time saving state is ended, but in this case, the result pattern is obtained as a variation pattern of the last time (final variation) in which the time saving state is ended. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time that can sufficiently produce an effect.

  As the result effect 146 is made to appear in the first rotation (the first game) after the transition to the normal state, it does not notify that the time saving state is ended by the current fluctuation as in the general result effect. It is preferable to use an effect that implies or suggests that the time saving state has completely exited (the state has fallen to the normal state) or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 31E (12), instead of a message such as “time saving mode end”, a message (type 1 approach encounter failure) 143 indicating that the mission for finding a disc failed, or a series of In addition, it includes an acquired ball number notification effect 145 indicating an approximate value (“GET + 3530”) of the acquired ball numbers acquired in the first hit. It is to be noted that the first rotation after the transition to the normal state may be adopted as the result effect that the final variation (in this example, the seventh rotation) in the short time state is worn. In this case, it is preferable not to display the right hitting instruction effect 135 and not to display the left hitting instruction effect 147 described later (FIG. 31E (12)), in order to pose the normal state as a short time state.

  In the normal state, as in the time-saving state, the symbol variation display game 1 according to the special view 1 is displayed as the main effect (effect in the normal effect mode). Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (12), the hold icon corresponding to the special view 1 is displayed in the hold display area 76 in addition to the decorative symbol 131 corresponding to the special view 1. In addition, since the result effect 146 is displayed in a large size in the liquid crystal screen, the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 (the lost decorative symbol of "556") is displayed small in the lower right corner.

  FIG. 31E (12) shows the stage of the state immediately before the finalized display of the fluctuation display of the special view 1, and the decorative symbol "556" is in the temporary stop display state (swing fluctuation) just before the finalized display. The display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31E (12) are: special figure 1 operation suspension ball number "3", special figure 1 in the fluctuation state "⇔", special figure 2 operation suspension sphere number "3" , Special figure 2 is in the fluctuation state "⇔". Here, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are being changed in parallel, but in the present example, thereafter, the change of the special figure 1 is ended first, and the special figure 2 continues the fluctuation state. Ru.

  From FIG. 31E (13) on, it is assumed that the player currently playing a game has left the time saving state, completely quit launching the game ball, and is preparing for leaving the game.

  FIG. 31E (13) shows a liquid crystal screen of the second rotation (second game) after the shift to the normal state. In the figure, vertical arrows drawn in the rectangular frame (in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36) indicate that the decorative symbol 131 is in motion. In the present embodiment, as described above, the left hitting instruction effect 147 is produced in the next second game because the result effect is produced in the first game after the normal state falling transition. The left hitting instruction effect 147 is displayed at the start of the current game (the second game), and ends after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, about 4 seconds).

  Further, in the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (13), one special drawing 1 operation holding ball is digested from the previous game, and a holding icon indicates two display states. Also, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31E (13) are “2” for the special figure 1 operation holding ball number “2”, and “3” for the special figure 2 operation holding ball number in the special state 1 “variation state”. , Special figure 2 is in the fluctuation state "⇔". Here, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are changing in parallel.

(About the case where the player has left when the back change is in the big hit change)
After that, the special figure 1 operation reserve ball 2 is all digested and the symbol variation display game 1 related to the final operation reserve ball is finished, and the special figure 1 becomes standby with 0 special figure 1 operation reserve balls. The player who was playing a game until after confirming that the result of the last symbol variation display game has become "lost", notice that the suspension of the special figure 2 remains or is changing Instead, assume a case where you have left this game stand. It should be noted that after this player leaves the game, explanation will be given on the assumption that no one is playing a game on the main game stand.

  FIG. 31E (14) shows that there is no special drawing 1 operation holding ball for special drawing 1, and the decorative symbol 131 is in the stop display (waiting) with the lost symbol “135”, and for special drawing 2 is 3 One of the special figure 2 actuation pending ball numbers is digested, and a new variation of the special figure 2 (symbol variation display game 2) is started, and the second actuation pending ball subjected to the present symbol variation is , Oddly, it shows the case that was a big hit winning reserve. Briefly speaking, the special figure 2 is the gaming situation during the big hit fluctuation (big hit fluctuation during normal fluctuation (usually, fluctuation per 4 minutes)) under the special figure 2 reverse fluctuation state. Therefore, the display contents of the exclusive display area 160 in FIG. 31E (14) are: special figure 1 operation pending ball number “0”, special figure 1 non-fluctuation state (lost symbol stop state) “X”, special figure 2 activation The number of retained balls “2”, the special figure 2 is in the fluctuation state (here, during the big hit fluctuation) “⇔”.

  When the operation reserving ball of the special figure 2 is stored, as described above, in the case of the lost fluctuation or the small hitting fluctuation in the "normal state", the fluctuation time is 600 seconds (10 minutes fluctuation among the non-latency 1 6), even if it is a big hit, the symbol variation display game 2 will be played for a long time of 240 seconds (usually, fluctuation per 4 minutes).

  During the normal state, there is a relationship of “special figure 1 surface fluctuation state, special figure 2 back fluctuation state”. Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (14), the effect relating to the symbol variation display game 2 on the side of the special figure 2 is not revealed, and the result of the symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side last executed. As, the decorative symbol 131 corresponding to the special figure 1 is in the state of being stopped and displayed at "135 (missing eyes)" indicating losing.

  Thereafter, as time passes, the jackpot fluctuation during the back fluctuation (usually, fluctuation per four minutes) ends. As a result, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31F (15) is “0” for the special figure 1 operation holding ball number “0” for the special figure 1 and “X” for the non-fluctuating state (lost symbol stop state) “X” The number of operation pending balls “2”, the special figure 2 is the non-fluctuating state (big hit symbol stop state) “o”, and it is shown that the special figure 2 of the back fluctuation is the big hit.

  FIG. 31F (15) shows the gaming situation in which the "big figure 2 special hit" has occurred when the big hit fluctuation (normal fluctuation within 4 minutes) during the above-mentioned back fluctuation has ended. In the same figure, in the liquid crystal screen, in the vicinity of the upper part of the dedicated display area 160 or in a display form overlapping, a “back right” instruction effect 135 a ′ for instructing “rightward” is displayed. The back right strike instruction effect 135 a is displayed smaller than the dedicated display area 160. In addition, when a big hit game by the back big hit occurs, it has become a right-handed directing effect that is displayed with no other effect.

  The back right strike instruction effect 135a is ended after the combination gate effective waiting time (5 seconds) has elapsed. This point is the same as the special figure 1 table big hit shown in FIG. 31A (2) and FIG. 31B (3). In addition, the effect control unit 24 can grasp whether or not it is a big hit due to back fluctuation by the “big hit start command” transmitted from the main control unit 20 at the start of the big hit game. The jackpot start command includes gaming state information at the time of winning and jackpot type information of winning. When the effect control unit 24 receives the big hit start command, if the information included in this is, for example, the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state, and the big hit type is any of the big hit 5 to 8, this time It can be understood that the big hit is a big hit due to back fluctuation. Of course, the effect control unit 24 may be configured to be able to identify whether or not it is a big hit due to back fluctuation by using another command or providing a dedicated command.

  Referring to FIG. 31F (16), after the bonus gate effective waiting time (5 seconds) has elapsed, a flip gate winning command effect 137a 'is issued to instruct game ball passage to the bonus gate 57. The back gate winning instruction effect 137a is, similarly to the back right hitting instruction effect 135a, a gate winning instruction effect that is displayed with no other effect. The back gate winning instruction effect 137a is displayed on the combination gate 57 until the game ball passes. This point is the same as the case of the special figure 1 table big hit shown in FIG. 31B (3)).

  In addition, for the decoration lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45), since the big hit of this time is special figure 2 back big hit, the light effect of the normal big hit (for example, the decorative lamp 45 of the gaming machine 1 of FIG. 31A (2) The presentation 132) is not executed. In the present embodiment, for the light effect and the sound effect, for example, the same effect state (for example, extinguished) is obtained as in the waiting for a customer. In this effect state, it waits for the game ball to pass through the combination gate 57.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit of this time is the special figure 2 reverse big hit, although the indication effects 135 and 137 appear, the display thereof is executed and the special figure 1 big hit like a big hit A big hit start presentation (opening production) is announced and it is reported that it is a big hit quietly as much as possible. In this way, by applying measures against the back big hit also in the hit production, it is possible to prevent the uncomfortable feeling given to the surroundings even if a big hit is suddenly generated from the game stand where no one is present, and effectively prevent the hyena act It can be done.

  In FIG. 31F (17), when the game ball passes through the gate 57, as in FIG. 31B (4), the signal during the big hit is output as usual, and the 1R's round game, the effect during the round, etc. Is started. Also, the data counter DT side starts big hit notification and updates the data display content (the number of big hit DTd etc.) (refer to the data counter DT in the lower part of FIG. 31B (4)).

(Special jackpot announcement production: Figure 31F)
By the way, under the game situation of the above-mentioned FIG. 31F (15) (16), it is in the state in the big hit game (here in the big hit game by the special figure 2 back hit), but the game ball passes through the gate 57 Until then, the back gate winning instruction effect 137a continues to appear, and is in a state of waiting for the start of the round game. The back gate winning instruction effect 137a is a relatively small message displayed in the lower left corner and is hard to notice. It is assumed that the player who has been seated in the game stand in such a state starts the game while aiming for a winning to the middle start opening 34 by hitting left as usual. In addition, in the simultaneous fluctuation type, when one special figure is a big hit, the fluctuation of the other special figure is stopped due to a forced loss, or the fluctuation display is continued while the clocking of the fluctuation movement time is interrupted. Even if the game ball is won in the middle starting opening 34, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not start, which gives the player a sense of distrust. In such a case, it is preferable to quickly notify the player that the player is in a big hit (back hit).

  So, in this embodiment, when the big hit currently occurring is caused by the big hit (back hit) on the back fluctuation state side, it is informed that the back big hit is in progress under a predetermined appearing condition It has a configuration that allows the appearance of "special jackpot announcement effect". For example, the following conditions A and B can be used as the appearing condition of the special jackpot notice effect.

(Condition A) Winning a big hit in the big hit lottery of the special figure side which becomes the back change, and that a predetermined time T has elapsed from the start of the big hit change (satisfying the relationship of “change time ≦ T”).
(Condition B) That there was a prize to the starting figure of the special figure side which becomes table fluctuation.
Under the condition that the condition A and the condition B are satisfied, the special jackpot announcement effect is produced.

  Specifically, the main control unit 20 wins a big hit on the special view 2 side during the normal state (a special hit on the special view 2 back hit), which is a big hit fluctuation pattern relating to the back fluctuation. When "variation per four minutes" is selected, a fluctuation pattern designation command capable of specifying the fluctuation is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation per four minutes during this normal period is measured. Then, as the predetermined time, for example, the fluctuation per normal four minutes normally ends. When four minutes have passed, a dedicated effect control command (back hit) command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Upon receiving the back big hit middle command, the production control unit 24 controls the production state (production mode) to "special big hit middle notification production execution waiting state", and waits for winning to the special figure 1 starting opening. Specifically, it waits for the special addition side hold command to be sent. As described above, when one special view is a big hit, waiting for the hold addition command can not start a new change in the other special view, and the main control unit 20 issues a command related to the variable display ( For example, it is because it is not possible to transmit a fluctuation pattern specification command or the like. For this reason, the hold addition command is optimal as a command serving as an execution trigger of the special jackpot medium notification effect.

  The effect control unit 24 makes the special jackpot notice effect appear when the special view 1 side of the hold addition command is received under the special jackpot notice effect execution waiting state. There are no particular restrictions on the contents of the special big hit middle notification effects, but the preferred one is that it is known that the back big hit is in progress. For example, from the viewpoint of the kind instruction effect described above, regardless of whether or not the combination gate effective waiting time has elapsed, at least the right strike instruction effect 135 is made to largely appear on the liquid crystal screen to strike the player right. It is preferable to prompt. In addition, it can also be controlled to the special jackpot medium notification production execution waiting state triggered by having received the jackpot start command. In this case, it is possible to control to the special jackpot medium notification production execution waiting state from the time of the back jackpot occurrence.

(Back swing during the big hit notice production: Figure 31G)
Also, if the same problem as the gaming situation of FIG. 31F (15) (16) described above is the gaming situation of FIG. 31E (14), that is, the back fluctuation is in the big hit fluctuation (usually in the middle of 4 minutes) Can also occur.

  Specifically, in the gaming situation of FIG. 31E (14), the back fluctuation is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation (usually, fluctuation per 4 minutes). In the game stand in such a state, since the target of the main effect is the symbol variation display game 1, the player normally strikes left and advances the game while aiming for a prize in the middle starting opening 34. It is considered to be However, if the special figure 2 is a big hit change, the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 executed during the change will be "big hit without lottery (loss lottery)" Even if I receive a jackpot lottery, I will return to nothing. In such a case, it is preferable to quickly notify the player that the back fluctuation currently being executed is a big hit fluctuation.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation related to the back movement is in the middle, it is possible to bring out the "back movement middle jackpot notice effect" notifying that the back movement is the jackpot under a predetermined appearance condition. It can be done. For example, the following condition C can be set as the condition for the reverse fluctuation medium big hit preliminary announcement effect to appear.

(Condition C) Win a big hit (for example, one of the big hits 5 to 8) in the big hit lottery of the special figure side (for example, special figure 2 in the normal state) related to back fluctuation (special figure 2 back big hit winning), When the special figure relating to the big hit is in motion (when the special figure 2 is in motion (when the symbol variation display game 2 is in execution)), the starting port (for example, special figure 1) relating to the table variation , That there was a winning in the middle starting opening 34) (condition C-1), or that variation on the special figure side (special figure 1) related to table variation is started (condition C-2).
Under the condition that the above-mentioned condition C is satisfied, the reverse fluctuation during the big hit notice effect is made to appear. In addition, about said (conditions C-1) and said (conditions C-2), any one conditions are employable.

  Specifically, the main control unit 20 wins a big hit on the special view 2 side during the normal state (a special hit on the big hit in the special view 2 back hit), and "the fluctuation per 4 minutes during the normal hit" related to the big hit. Is selected, a variation pattern designation command capable of identifying the variation is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this fluctuation pattern designating command, the effect control unit 24 recognizes that the current fluctuation pattern is "fluctuation per normal four minutes", and "during back fluctuation" until the fluctuation ends. It is controlled to "the jackpot notice execution waiting state". Then, when the above (condition C-1) is set as the appearing condition, the effect control unit 24 waits for the sending of the hold addition command on the side of the special figure 1 side, and causes the above (condition C-2) to become active. In the case of using the output condition, it waits for the fluctuation pattern specification command according to the special figure 1 to be sent. The production control unit 24 receives the hold addition command on the special view 1 side (in the case of (condition C-1) above) or receives the fluctuation pattern designation command under the back fluctuation middle big hit notice production execution wait state In the case (the case of the above (condition C-2)), the back change makes the big hit notice effect appear. In the case of making the jackpot notice effect appear during the back fluctuation, by making it appear suddenly, it is possible to produce an effect that strikes the player's intention, and the degree of impact at the time of appearance becomes high. For example, after the liquid crystal screen is displayed in blackout (blackout effect), the jackpot effect in the back change is made to appear.

(A concrete example of back swing during a big hit notice production: FIG. 31G)
FIG. 31G shows an example of the effect of the back fluctuation middle hitting notice production. Here, similarly to FIG. 31E (14), with regard to the special drawing 1, the special drawing 1 operation holding ball 0 and the decorative symbol 131 are in the stop display (waiting) with the lost symbol “135”, and the special drawing As for 2, it is assumed that there are two special drawing 1 operation reserving balls, and the special drawing 2 is in fluctuation during normal 4 minutes (big hit fluctuation related to back fluctuation). In FIG. 31G (14A), under this gaming situation, there is a prize in the middle starting opening 34, and the above (condition C-1) or the above (condition C-2) is satisfied, and the back fluctuation middle hit notice effect is revealed Shows the case. Therefore, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31G (14A) is “0” for the special figure 1 operation suspension ball number, “2” for the special figure 1 fluctuation state “ The special figure 2 is in a fluctuating state (usually fluctuating during the middle four minutes). Further, FIG. 31G (14B) shows the back fluctuation medium-sized big hit advance notice effect 30 seconds after the state of FIG. 31G (14A).

  The code | symbol 173 of FIG. 31 G (14A) is a back fluctuation during a big hit notice production. The back fluctuation medium big hit advance notice effect 173 has effect contents including a countdown timer 170, a message 171, a plurality of disk images 133, and the like.

  The countdown timer effect 170 displays an elapsed time (may be a rough value) from the start of the big hit fluctuation (usually, fluctuation per 4 minutes during the normal movement) related to the back fluctuation (here, special figure 2), A countdown is displayed and it is informed to the player whether or not the change ends and the big hit starts. Also, the message 171 consists of "A super chance is coming! Don't fire the ball! Wait for 200 seconds without leaving!" (B) A special symbol variation display game currently being executed by the "super chance coming!" Message 2 (back swing) that the jackpot expectation of winning is high expectation level or accurate, (b) It is likely to become a waste ball if you shoot the ball by the message "Don't launch the ball!" In addition, it is possible to notify that there is a possibility that the jackpot may be lost if the user leaves the seat by means of the message "Do not leave the seat and wait for 200 seconds!". Also, a large corps UFO (a plurality of disk images 133) is displayed, in which a cow image 134 is displayed. This cow image 134 shows that it is highly likely to have won the big hit 5 to 7 (normal probability variation big hit), and in the present embodiment, when the cow image 134 appears to be mixed in with the UFO group, the big hit Indicates that one of 5 to 7 has been won.

  In addition, the back fluctuation medium big hit preliminary announcement production 173 is one feature of the precision production which reports that back fluctuation is big hit fluctuation (big hit election state). Therefore, during the emergence of the back fluctuation during the big hit notice effect 173, the advance notice effect (reach effect etc.) and the advance notice effect pertaining to the symbol change display game 1 (table change side) on the side of the special figure 1 will not appear Even if the production is in progress cancel all. However, the decorative symbol 131 related to the special figure 1 is not displayed during the change, but at the end of the change, the small left corner is stopped and displayed at the lower right corner, and the symbol change display game 1 on the special figure 1 side is ended. Is notified (see FIG. 31G (14B)). In addition, during the emergence of the back fluctuation middle big hit advance notice effect 173, it is configured not to execute "left-handed warning notification effect" and "right-handed warning notification effect".

<Process on Main Control Unit Side: FIGS. 8A to 30C>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8A-FIG. 30C, the game operation processing in the main control part 20 side of this embodiment is demonstrated. The process on the main control unit 20 side is an infinite loop main process (main control side main process: FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt activated by a scheduled interrupt from CTC) Processing: FIG. 13) is included.

<10. Main control side main processing: FIGS. 8A and 8B>
The main process (main control side main process) on the main control unit 20 side will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8. FIG. 8A and FIG. 8 are flowcharts showing details of main processing on the main control unit 20 side. This main processing starts when the system reset occurs at the time of recovery from a power failure or a power failure, or when the control program runs out, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is exhibited and the CPU is activated. In some cases, reset (WDT reset) is forced. In any case, when the main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first initializes the values of the registers of each unit including the CPU 201, monitors the power supply state of the peripheral substrate, etc. The initial setting process necessary for the start of the game operation is executed (step S011). The initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the initial setting process of step S011 is finished, the information of the input port 1 (not shown) is acquired and set in the W register (step S012), and the W register is subjected to predetermined mask processing. The input state (ON / OFF state) of the setting key signal), the RAM clear switch 98 (RAM clear signal), and the door open sensor 61 (door open signal) is acquired (step S013). Information of the input port 1 according to the present embodiment (information indicated by the least significant bit (b0) to the most significant bit (b7)) is, as illustrated, the ON / OFF state (b0 of the setting key signal (setting key switch 94) , ON / OFF state (b1) of RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), ON / OFF state (b2) of door open signal (door open sensor 61), disconnection detection signal 1 (b3), disconnection detection signal 2 (B4), ON / OFF state (b5) of counting error signal (ball counting sensor 19b), ON / OFF state (b6) of out-of-resupply signal (out-of-resupply detecting sensor 19a), power on signal and payout communication confirmation signal Is in the ON / OFF state (b7). For example, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM, and normally has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear switch 98 operated by a hall clerk. There is. The setting key signal is one of the signals for determining whether or not to shift to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, and, like the above-mentioned RAM clear switch, the setting key normally operated by a hall clerk It has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the switch 94. For this reason, if the acquisition timing of the RAM clear signal or the setting change signal is delayed, the hall clerk will miss the ON operation by releasing the hand from the switch, but in the present embodiment, such a situation is avoided. In addition, these signals are to be acquired promptly when power is restored.

  In this embodiment, the combination of the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door open sensor 61, specifically, the bit pattern “W of lower 3 bits of W register obtained in step S013 (X, y, z): “setting change processing (step) described later according to the transition processing state (branch determination condition) specified by x, y, z = 1 (on state) or 0 (off state)” S022), “setting confirmation process (step S026)”, “in-area RAM clearing process (step S028)”, or “backup restoration process (step S027)”, one of four processes is executed. It is supposed to be. The above transition processing state (branch judgment condition) is as shown in FIG. 8C, and in the case of W (1, 1, 1), in the case of “setting change transition state”, W (1, 0, 1 or 0) Is “setting confirmation transition state”, “W (0, 1, 1 or 0)” specifies “RAM clear transition state”, and W (0, 0, 1 or 0) specifies “backup recovery transition state” . Since the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are provided inside the gaming machine, the front frame 2 must be opened when operating these switches, so the door opening sensor 61 is usually , ON state (door open signal ON). Further, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the control burden, at least until the game start-ready state is established (for example, before the processing (CTC setting processing in step S035 described later) is executed (main control side of FIG. 13) Perform door open error notification even if the front frame 2 is in the open state (door open state) or before the timer interrupt process is started) or at least before the loop process in steps S039 to S042 is executed) It is supposed not to. However, when the door opening sensor 61 is in the ON state, information to the effect that the door opening sensor 61 is ON is transmitted to the hall computer HC by the security signal.

(Setting change processing execution processing route: steps S020 to S023)
In the process of step S014, it is determined whether the bit pattern of the W register is W (1, 1, 1) corresponding to the setting change transition state (step S014). In the case of W (1, 1, 1) (step S014: = W (1, 1, 1)), it is first designated that the setting is being changed, assuming that the “setting change transition state” is set. A setting change in-progress command (BA5AH) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S020). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting change display command, the setting change effect for notifying that the setting value is being changed is executed using the effect means. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully illuminated in blue, and the speaker 16 outputs an alarm sound of “setting is being changed ♪”, and the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed an effect image of “setting being changed”.

  Next, the in-area RAM initialization process (RAM clear process at power on) is executed (step S021). In this area RAM initialization process, all areas (normal data) of the area RAM for storing data used in the normal game process (the game process of the symbol variation display game, etc.) excluding at least the set value storage area The storage area is initialized (cleared) to return the operating state of the gaming machine to the initial state (step S 021). In the present embodiment, the program and storage area for processing related to performance display are different from the area (in-area memory (first memory area)) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progression (the out-of-area memory (second memory) Memory area)). Specifically, main control unit 20 is a first RAM area (in-area RAM) capable of storing game data used in the game process related to normal game progress (for example, a process other than the process related to the display of performance indicator 99). And a second RAM area (RAM outside the area) capable of storing information display data used in information display processing (steps S033 and S040 in FIG. 8B and step S101 in FIG. 13 etc.) not directly related to the game progression. And a first ROM area (in-area ROM) for storing a game control program for executing the normal game process, and an information display control program for executing the information display process. 2) ROM 202 including ROM area (ROM outside area), game control operation based on game control program and information display control program To perform configured to include a CPU 201, a. Here, the clear target is only the RAM area (in-area RAM) related to the in-area memory. Even in the area RAM, data in the setting value storage area (setting value data) is not to be cleared. The initialization and change of the set value data are performed in a setting change process (FIG. 11) described later.

  The above-described "normal data storage area" mainly includes various flags used in step S039 of FIG. 8B, and steps S081 to S085, S089 to S095, S097 to S100, etc. And various data such as an operation timer and a counter are stored (stored in a storage area corresponding to various data), and the following data is representative.

Flags relating to various functions for specifying the gaming state ("General purpose game opening extension state flag specifying the operating state of the opening extension function," Normal pattern time saving state flag specifying the operating state of the normal symbol time reduction function , "Normal symbol probability variation state flag" to specify the operating condition of the special symbol probability variation function, "special symbol time short status flag" to designate the actuation condition of the special symbol time minor function, "special symbol to designate the actuation status of the special symbol probability variation function Positive change status flag ")
"Special symbol time short counter" to count the number of operations of special symbol time short function, "special symbol probability change number counter" to count the number of operations of special symbol probability variation function,
Various data (big hit judgment flag, small hit judgment flag, special symbol judgment data, special stop symbol number etc) concerning big hit lottery result
"Various data related to the execution of a hit game (current number of rounds (number of special motorized product operations), specified number of rounds, number of winning prize winnings, condition device operation flag, small hit middle flag, character continuous operation device operation flag etc)",
"Parameters related to the operating state of special symbol (special symbol stop 1 flag, special symbol stop 2 flag, flag during variation flag, special symbol operation status, special symbol operation check data etc)", "Various operation timer to manage the game progress (performance Timer for display not included) ",
"Playing state data (playing state number YJ) that can specify the current playing state",
“Input / output data related to switches / sensors (Excludes input data from sensors such as winning openings related to performance display)”,
For example, "a winning counter that counts winning balls", "various error flags", and the like.
In any case, when the in-area RAM initialization process (step S 021) is executed, all data other than the specific data (setting value data, data used for displaying the base value) are set to the initial state. .

  Although details will be described later, a predetermined area (RAM outside the area) of the RAM 203 related to the memory outside the area, that is, a RAM area related to performance information (measurement information storage area, performance display storage area, LED data setting related to the performance indicator 99 Area etc.) is to perform initialization process (out-of-area RAM clear process) when a problem occurs in the RAM area in the performance display monitor process (step S101) of FIG. 28 described later (step S101) Step S101 of FIG. 13, step S823 of FIG. 28, see FIG. As described above, the work area of the RAM 203 is divided, and the out-of-area RAM is not initialized (cleared) in the RAM initialization processing at power on. As a result, even when the RAM is initialized at power-on, data such as the number of normal payouts, the number of normal outs, and the base value related to performance display can be taken over across power interruptions. It is possible.

  Then, when the in-area RAM initialization process (step S021) is finished, next, the setting change process related to the change of the setting value is executed (step S022). Details of the setting change processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, in order to determine that the setting change transition state (the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is in the ON state (here, the door opening sensor 61 is in the ON state)), It is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 with the power supply (main power supply) turned off (power off), and turn on the power (power on) in the ON state. That is, in order to change the setting value, with the front frame 2 in the open state and turning off the power of the gaming machine, the setting key switch 94 is put on the setting value change mode side (ON operation). It is necessary to turn on the power while keeping the ON state. This is because, if the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, it takes at least several seconds from the power on to the turning on operation. This is because it is determined that the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is in the OFF state (step S014: W (1, 1, 1)), and the setting change process of step S022 is not executed. . In this case, as shown in the drawing, the processing route in which step S015 is executed is traced, and thereafter, control is performed to the setting value change operation prohibition state. Therefore, if you want to change the setting value and turn on the power without turning on the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98, turn off the power once, then turn the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98. The power should be turned on again with the switch ON. When the setting change process is executed, the setting change operation permission state is maintained even when the RAM clear switch 98 is turned off.

  When the setting change process (step S022) is finished, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted (step S023), and the process proceeds to the process of step S032 shown in FIG. 8B described later. When the presentation control unit 24 receives a command waiting for a customer, an explanation for the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an instruction for waiting for a customer for introduction (demonstration) based on a predetermined appearance condition (a customer waiting demonstration screen) Make it appear. In addition, the process after the process of step S032 is demonstrated later for the facilities of description.

  Returning to the description of step S014, if the bit pattern of the W register is not W (1, 1, 1) corresponding to the setting change transition state (step S014: ≠ W (1, 1, 1)), then the RAM is abnormal It is determined whether there is any (step S015). The data of the RAM area to be determined here is setting value data of the setting value storage area. In the present embodiment, six settings of setting values 1 to 6 are defined, and values of 00H to 05H are defined as data specifying these setting values 1 to 6. Therefore, the set value storage area should store any set value data (normal value) of 00H to 05H. However, the set value data may become an abnormal value other than 00H to 05H due to some problem such as noise.

  Therefore, in this process, when the setting data is acquired from the setting value storage area, and the acquired setting value is not any value of 00H to 05H (when it is not the normal value), that is, the acquired setting value is the setting values 1 to 6. If none of the above applies (step S015: YES), it is determined that an abnormality occurs in the set value data (the set value data is not correct), the process proceeds to step S018, and the power is turned on again as the RAM error process. The command (0B07H) is transmitted (step S018). When the effect control unit 24 receives the power re-on command, the effect re-on instruction effect is executed using the effect means. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, the alarm sound is output from the speaker 16, and the effect image such as "Please turn on the RAM error power again and set the setting value to 1" on the liquid crystal display 36 Display. Then, a first power supply abnormality check process shown in FIG. 10A described later is executed (step S019).

  If it is determined in step S015 that the RAM is not abnormal (step S015: NO), it is determined whether the backup flag BF is a normal value (5AH) (step S016). The backup flag BF is set to 5AH (normal value) in the process of the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 13) described later. In the case of power on or recovery from a power failure state, the content of the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, if a failure occurs for some reason and the backup flag BF is not the normal value (00H, etc.) (step S016: AH 5AH), the same as the case of the RAM abnormality described above (the determination result in step S014 is YES) Similarly, the process proceeds to step S018, a power reapply command (0B07H) is transmitted (step S018), and the first power failure check process is executed (step S019).

(10-2-1. First power source abnormality check process: FIG. 10 (A))
The process of the first power supply abnormality check process (step S019) will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart showing details of the first power supply abnormality check process.

  In FIG. 10A, the CPU 201 first clears the WDT (step S056), and exits the first power supply abnormality check process if it does not confirm the ON state of the power supply abnormality signal indicating power interruption (step S057: NO). . That is, when an abnormality (RAM error) occurs in the storage contents of the RAM 203, the apparatus is placed in a power resumption waiting state where the WDT clear process (step S056) and the power failure confirmation process (step S057) are repeated indefinitely. Therefore, when a RAM error occurs, the process relating to the game progress does not proceed thereafter, and the game is continued until the power is turned on again (until, in the case of this embodiment, the setting change process of step S022 is executed) Operation will be stopped (game stop processing). If a RAM error occurs, WDT clear processing is executed until a power supply abnormality signal is confirmed, and WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop processing is repeated.

  If the ON state of the power supply abnormality signal is confirmed (step S057: YES), the process returns to the process of step S011 of FIG. 8A, and the processes of step S011 and subsequent steps are sequentially executed as in the case of power on.

  However, in the present embodiment, even if a RAM error such as setting value data abnormality (RAM abnormality) or backup abnormality (backup flag abnormality) occurs, the contents of RAM 203 are cleared in the subsequent processing (steps S018 to S019). Processing is not performed. Therefore, if the set value data and backup data remain in the damaged state, the damaged data remains even if the power is turned on again, and the setting change transition state (W register when the power is turned on) Steps S018 to S019 will be executed again unless it is set to = W (1, 1, 1)). Therefore, once the RAM error occurs, the RAM error is not resolved even if the power is simply turned on again, and the RAM error is not resolved unless the setting change process of step S 022 is performed. For this reason, the above-mentioned power supply reactivation command is transmitted in step S018, and the effect control unit 24 that has received the command returns "RAM error power supply again to the liquid crystal display device 36" as a RAM error notification (power supply reactivation instruction effect). Therefore, the hall clerk is urged to eliminate the RAM error by displaying an effect image such as “set the setting value to 1”.

  It returns to description of FIG.8A step S015. If the RAM is not abnormal (step S015: NO) and the backup flag BF is a normal value (5 AH) (step S016: = 5 AH), the W register is subjected to predetermined mask processing, and the setting key switch 94 (setting The input information of the key signal and the RAM clear switch 98 (RAM clear signal) is acquired (step S017).

(Backup restoration processing execution processing route: step S24 → S027)
Then, referring to FIG. 8B, it is determined whether the bit pattern of the W register is W (0, 0) corresponding to the backup recovery transition state (step S024). If it is W (0, 0) (step S024: = W (0, 0)), it is assumed that it is "backup return transition state (refer to FIG. 8C)", based on the backed up game information just before power off. A backup recovery process for resuming the game is executed (step S27).

  In this backup recovery process, first, the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the stored contents of the RAM (backup data saved at power shutdown) saved by the backup function (not shown) at the time of power shutdown. Perform recovery processing necessary to start the game from the processing state at the time of power shutoff, and restore the game operation at the time of power shutoff (game return means). In addition, here, predetermined game information (for example, special figure 1 · special figure 2 operation hold ball (hold data) at the time of power supply shut off, information about a hit game, game state information etc.) is acquired from backup data, and the information The one or more types of game recovery commands included are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When receiving the game return command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the game progress state when the power is shut off based on the game information included in the command, and restores the effect state when the power is shut off. Then, when the recovery processing is finished, the power failure recovery display command (BA03H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the backup recovery processing is finished. When the effect control unit 24 receives the power failure return display command, the effect means causes the “restoration completion effect” to notify that the restoration is completed. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image such as “Return from blackout, please restart game”. When the backup recovery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S032 described later.

(RAM clear processing execution processing route: step S 25 → S 028 to S 030)
Returning to the description of step S024 in FIG. 8B, if the bit pattern of the W register is not W (0, 0) corresponding to the backup recovery transition state (step S024: ≠ W (0, 0)) It is determined whether the bit pattern is W (0, 1) corresponding to the RAM clear transition state (step S025). If it is W (0, 1) (step S 025: = W (0, 1)), the in-area RAM processing processing is executed (step S 028) on the assumption that “the RAM clear transition state (see FIG. . The intra-area RAM processing process of step S028 is the same process as the intra-area RAM processing process of step S021. Next, the RAM clear command (BA20H) and the customer waiting command (BA04H) are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S029), and notification of the fact that the RAM is cleared is given around (including notification to the hall computer HC) As the time to do this, a predetermined notification time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the RAM clear notification timer (step S030). Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode" in the initial state, and the effect state is returned to the initial state, and an error corresponding to the RAM clear using the effect means. The notification (RAM clear notification effect) is performed for the same 30 seconds as the setting time of the notification timer. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, the alarm sound from the speaker 16 is output when the RAM is cleared, and the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a rendering image such as "RAM is being cleared". Also, at step S029, while the RAM clear command is sent and the customer waiting command is sent, at this timing, the customer wait waiting effect is not executed, and after the RAM clear notification is executed for 30 seconds, the customer wait is waited. Perform the production. For example, the warning sound is faded out, and a guest waiting demonstration screen or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. In the present embodiment, the RAM clear notification effect (RAM clear notification) is to be executed with the highest priority.

  Note that, as described above, in the in-area RAM initialization process (steps S021 and S028) according to the present embodiment, the setting value storage area (setting value data) of the in-area RAM is not initialized. The initialization, change, and the like (including the clearing of the backup flag BF) are performed in setting change processing (FIG. 11) described later. Therefore, the setting is performed only when the in-area RAM initialization processing in step S028 (the same applies to the case where the set value is not changed after initialization in step S021 (the same setting is repeated)) is performed. Although the value remains the same value at the time of the previous power off, the game will be started in the state (normal state, and initial state such as no hold data, etc.) in which the gaming state, hold data, etc. are initialized. . Thus, for example, when it is desired to hand over only the set value from the sales the day before, the clear work is completed by the simple operation of ON / OFF operation of the RAM clear switch 98 even if the setting change operation with many work processes is not performed. It has the advantage of

(Setting confirmation process execution process route: step S24 → S026)
On the other hand, if the bit pattern of the W register is not W (0, 1) corresponding to the RAM clear transition state (step S025: = W (1, 0)), that is, “setting confirmation transition state (see FIG. 8C)”. If it is W (1, 0) corresponding to, the setting confirmation process according to the setting value confirmation operation is executed (step S026). The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the setting confirmation process is completed, the backup recovery process (step S027) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S032.

  As described above, according to the combination of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the ON / OFF state of the door opening sensor 61, "setting change processing (step S022)", "setting confirmation processing (step S026)" After the processing in any of “in-area RAM clear processing (step S028)” and “backup restoration processing (step S027)” is executed and the processing is completed, the contents of all the registers are saved (step S032), The operation confirmation timer setting process (FIG. 8D) described later is executed (step S033), and the contents of all the saved registers are restored (step S034).

(10-2-2. Operation confirmation timer setting process: FIG. 8D)
The process of the operation confirmation timer setting process (step S033) will be described. FIG. 8D is a flowchart showing the details of the operation confirmation timer setting process. In this operation confirmation timer setting process, the initial setting required for the confirmation operation when the performance indicator 99 is turned on is performed. In the present embodiment, in order to perform an operation check on the performance indicator 99 as part of the processing at power on, all seven segments of the LED are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after power on. It is configured to perform an "operation confirmation display" in which all the light emission is periodically repeated and blinked. The process (operation check process) related to the operation check display of the performance indicator 99 is performed during the performance display monitor process in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) described later (step S101 in FIG. 13, FIG. 28 steps S833, FIG. 30B).

  Here, after completing the series of processes at power on in steps S011 to S030, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is activated in step S035, but temporarily, at power on for detecting switch input etc. If the timer interrupt process is started from the time the performance display monitor process is also executed from the time the power is turned on, and the operation confirmation timer setting process is executed for the dark cloud, the operation confirmation display is being performed during setting confirmation or setting change. Is performed and the operation check becomes sparse. In addition, at the time of power failure recovery such as power on or system reset (at the time of power reset), various processing at power on such as setting confirmation processing, setting change processing and backup recovery processing can be executed. If the timer setting process is executed, the process becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the game start state can not be smoothly adjusted. It may also lead to control burdens. In addition, although the time interval of the timer interrupt process is about 4 ms in this embodiment, depending on the control program, the interrupt time interval may be executed in a very short time such as about 1 ms. If the command is executed, the base value may be precededly displayed than the operation confirmation display, and the operation check may be complicated. In consideration of these various circumstances, it is preferable to execute the operation confirmation timer setting process at least before the timer interrupt process is activated (before step S035), at the time of a series of power on at steps S011 to S030. It is more preferable to execute the process before the timer interrupt process of step S035 is started after the process is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, the timer interrupt process is started after the series of power-on processes including the setting confirmation process, the backup recovery process, the setting change process, and the in-area RAM clear process are finished. The operation confirmation timer setting process is performed prior to the CTC setting process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 8D, the CPU 201 first stores a stack pointer specifying a stack area in a predetermined area (step S881). Next, an initial value (for example, 5000 ms) is set to the operation confirmation timer that counts the operation confirmation time of the performance indicator 99 (step S882), and the blinking timer that counts the blinking period of the performance indicator 99 is zero cleared (flickering Timer 0 0) (step S883). Then, the stack pointer is restored, and the operation confirmation timer setting process is exited.

  When the processes of steps S032 to S034 related to the operation check are finished, next, setting processing of CTC for generating a timer interrupt periodically is performed every 4 ms (step S035). Thereafter, an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 is executed. Although the details will be described later, in the main control side timer interrupt process, an input management process for monitoring the switch ON / OFF state, an LED management process for controlling the display of the LED, a control process of the symbol variation display game, a control of the hit game Various processing related to the game progress such as processing is performed.

  Next, assuming that the game start enable state is established, the emission control signal (emission permission signal ES) is set from the OFF state to the ON state (step S036). Specifically, a launch control signal for permitting the launch operation of the launch device 32 is output to the payout control board 29. When receiving the emission control signal, the payout control substrate 29 determines that the emission is permitted, outputs the emission control signal to the emission control substrate 28, and permits the emission operation of the emission device 32. As a result, the firing operation inhibition state is controlled to the firing operation permission state, and the firing operation handle 15 can fire the gaming ball. In the present embodiment, a configuration in which the payout control board 29 receives the firing control signal from the main control unit 20 and allows the firing operation, that is, the instruction information of firing permission from the main control unit 20 passes through the payout control board 29. Although the configuration is such that the discharge control substrate 28 is indirectly sent, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the emission control signal from the main control unit 20 may be directly output to the emission control board 28 to allow the emission operation.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the emission control signal is not output before the processing of step S035 is performed (the emission permission signal is controlled to be in the OFF state during the initialization processing of step S011). Is controlled (ie, step S046 in FIG. 9 described later), that is, control is made to the launch prohibition state. Therefore, for example, when the setting change operation is performed, the firing control signal is not output until the setting changing process (step S022) is finished (control to the OFF state), and the shooting control signal is output after the setting changing process is finished. (Control the firing permission signal to the ON state), control the firing permission state.

  Next, the game start command (BA 77 H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S 037). When the effect control unit 24 receives a game start command, it executes an initial operation (initialization operation) at the time of power-on regarding movable body effects such as the watch type character 80 and the flower type character 90. Then, when a series of power-on processes (S011 to S038: pre-game start process at power-on) are finished, the process proceeds to the game process (loop process of steps S038 to S041) related to the normal game progress. It will be controlled to the state where progress of a game is possible.

  Next, in a state where the CPU is set in the interrupt disabled state (step S038), various random number update processing is executed (step S039). In the various random number update processing, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) are updated for the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game. For example, random numbers for special symbol determination used for symbol lottery, random numbers for assistance per lottery (random number for assistance determination used for winning lottery for assistance, random number for assistance determination used for lottery for assistance, normal symbol determination used for symbol lottery for assistance) Random number (random number for special symbol judgment initial value random number, auxiliary hit judgment initial value random number, etc.) used for changing initial value (start value) of random number, random number for fluctuation pattern used for selection of fluctuation pattern, etc. Update.

  After the various random number update processing (step S039), the performance display monitor tabulation division processing is executed (step S040). In the performance display monitor tabulation division process, a process of calculating a base value to be displayed on the performance indicator 99 is performed.

  As described above, the program and storage area for processing related to performance display are stored in an out-of-area memory (second memory area) different from the in-area memory (first memory area) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progression. It is prescribed. Therefore, the CPU 201 first saves the stack pointer on the in-area memory side, and sets the stack pointer on the out-of-area memory side.

  Next, after executing the out-of-area RAM check process shown in FIG. 30A described later, it is obtained during the performance display monitor process (see step S101 described later and step S828 in FIG. 28 described later). , Middle start opening sensor 34a, right start opening sensor 33a, lower right start opening sensor 35a, upper large winning opening sensor 42a, lower large winning opening sensor 52a, general winning opening sensor 43a, each based on OUT monitoring switch 49a Check the presence or absence of a prize for each winning opening, the presence or absence of a game ball, etc.

  When the current gaming state is the normal state, when a winning is confirmed in any winning opening, the number of winning balls of the winning opening having a winning is added to the number of normal payouts (during the normal state) Prize ball addition processing), the normal number of outs and the total number of outs are added by 1 (out ball number addition processing), and the current count value is updated. However, when the winning is not confirmed and the input to the OUT monitoring switch 49a is confirmed, 1 is added to only the normal out number and the total state out number, and these count values are updated (out state ball during normal state) Number addition process). On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the normal state (if it is any of the probability change state, the time saving state, and the latent state), even if it is confirmed that a winning is made to any winning opening, Without adding the number of winning balls, only the total number of outs is incremented by +1, and when the winning is not confirmed and the input to the OUT monitoring switch 49a is confirmed, the total number of outs is also incremented by one ((1) Unusual state during out ball number addition processing).

  Then, a base value is calculated based on the updated normal payout number and the normal out number, that is, the latest normal payout number and the normal out number, and the value is stored in the measurement information storage area of the RAM 203. . Whether or not the normal state is determined depends on whether or not the normal state determination flag described later (see steps S827 to S828 in the performance display monitoring process of FIG. 28) is in the ON state (5AH). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state number YJ managed by the in-area RAM may be directly obtained, and the current gaming state may be determined by the value of YJ.

  Here, "in the jackpot game" is basically the same "low probability · no power support" as in the normal state, but since it is a gaming state separate from the normal state, it is better to measure the base value. The number of winning balls in the special winning opening 40 is excluded from the counting targets (the detection information of the upper large winning opening sensor 42a is excluded from the measuring targets). On the other hand, the normal state also includes small hit games. This is because there is no internal game state transition control when the player wins the small hit, and the gaming state during the small hit game continues the game state at the time of the winning. Therefore, if the current gaming state is the normal state, the small hit game remains in the normal state during the small hit game, and the winning ball number of the lower large winning opening 50 in the normal state is included in the count target of the base value Information detected by the mouth sensor 52a is not excluded from the measurement target). In the case of the present embodiment, the big winning opening to be opened is different for the big hit and the small hit, but, for example, when using a common big winning opening (for example, one big winning opening is In order to exclude a winning on the special winning opening during the jackpot game, it may be determined whether or not the normal state is in accordance with the presence or absence of the operation of the condition device. Specifically, when the condition device is in operation, even if winning in the special winning opening is confirmed, it is excluded from the counting targets, and the condition device is not in operation (normal condition and small hit If it is confirmed during the game that a winning in the special winning opening has been confirmed, the number of winning balls may be added to the number of regular payouts, with this as the counting target.

  Also, from the time of initial power-on or all clear of out-of-area RAM, until the number of all-states out reaches a predetermined number (for example, 299), only the number of all-states out is counted as a test section and the base value etc. Does not measure. This is, for example, when the gaming machine is installed in the pachinko hall for the first time, as the operation test, for example, the game machine may be kept in the starting opening to check the operation or to test the operation. This is to eliminate the prize balls and out balls from the measurement object. Therefore, the first (first) measurement starts after the end of the test section.

  Also, if the total number of out-of-states reaches a specified number (60000 in this case) after the first (first) measurement has been started, the base value (first base value) at this point is displayed as the performance of the RAM 203 The data is stored in the storage area, and the current normal payout number, the normal out number, and the total out number are all cleared to zero (measurement data initialization processing) for the second measurement. That is, every time the specified number of 60000 is counted, the current base value is stored, and for the measurement of the next base value, the number of normal payouts under measurement, the number of normal outs, and the total number of outs are calculated. Clear to zero.

(Specific example of display mode of performance indicator 99)
A specific example of the display mode of the performance indicator 99 will be described. For example, in the case where the current base value is '35' when the number of all-states out reaches 60000, 4-digit character information (identification display unit (identification segment + “BL. 00” is displayed as the base display section (ratio segment) (the base value is 0 here because it is zero cleared by the measurement data initialization process described above), and “h” is displayed when the history base value is displayed. b6.35 "will be lit and displayed.

(During the test section)
In the above test section, when the real time base value is displayed to notify that the current measurement is a test section, “bL.” Is displayed on the identification display unit in a blinking manner, and the base display unit --- "is displayed. When the history base value is displayed, "b6." Is displayed on the identification display unit in a blinking manner, and "-" is displayed on the base display unit.

(First measurement: N = 1)
In addition, since the history base value is not saved at the time of the first measurement, “bL. **” ('**' is the base value currently being measured) is displayed when displaying the real-time base value. When the history base value is displayed, "b6.--" Is displayed. However, the identification display unit "b6." Is displayed in a blinking manner to notify that it is the first measurement.

(When measuring from next time on: N 2 2)
In addition, for the next and subsequent measurements (N 2 2), it is a measurement section with a variation in real-time base value until the number of all outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6000) after zero clear for the next measurement. In the case of displaying the real-time base value, “bL.” Is displayed on the identification display unit in a blinking manner, and the real-time base value is displayed on the base display unit as it is. When the history base value is displayed, "b6. **"('**' is the previous base value) is displayed. However, in the case of the first time (N = 1), since the history base value is not stored, when displaying the history base value, “b6 .--” is displayed, but “b6.” Of the identification display unit Is designed to blink.

  When the performance display monitor tabulation division process (step S041) is finished, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S042), the process returns to the process of step S039, and thereafter the processes of steps S039 to S042 are repeated (main loop process) . The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processing and performance display monitor total division processing except while performing timer interrupt processing that is intermittently executed.

(10-1. Initial setting process: FIG. 9)
Next, the initial setting process (step S011) in FIG. 8A will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the initial setting process.

  In FIG. 9, when a system reset or a WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 first sets itself as an interrupt disabled state as an initial setting at startup (step S043), and sets a stack pointer (step S044). Next, in preparation for using the stack in the first power supply abnormality check process, the protected and prohibited areas of the RAM are invalidated (S045). The RAM protect is a function to prevent rewriting of the RAM due to a malfunction or an erroneous operation. The operation of the RAM protect is as follows. After system reset or WDT reset occurs, the protection of RAM is enabled (RAM protected state). When the protection of the RAM is set to be effective, data can be read from the RAM, but data can not be written to the RAM. Therefore, when writing data to the RAM, it is necessary to set the protection of the RAM to be invalid. In addition, when the prohibited area is valid, if there is access to a preset address range (for example, a program related to change setting of setting values, etc.), the IAT generation signal is generated from the IAT circuit on the assumption that there is access other than the designated area. Is output to generate an IAT reset (prohibition of driving outside the designated area (IAT function)), but if the setting of the prohibited area is invalidated, this IAT reset does not occur. When an IAT reset occurs, only the CPU core is reset and the internal functions are not reset. However, when a system reset or a WDT reset occurs, all internal functions including the CPU core are reset. In other words, even if IAT reset occurs, RAM protection is not set, and CTC and WDT are not initialized, but if system reset or WDT reset occurs, RAM protection is set (protection of RAM is enabled). It is set, and CTC and WDT are initialized. However, even if any of the system reset, the WDT reset, and the IAT reset is performed, the stored contents of the RAM do not change. If an IAT reset occurs, the system may be reset as if an illegal program is executed.

  Next, in consideration of the possibility that the power is turned off / on during the setting change process described later, the security signal output from the frame external terminal board 21 is turned off, and the setting value to the setting display unit 97 In order to clear the display data relating to the display and to prevent the inadvertent emission of the emission control signal (emission permission signal) from being output, the emission permission signal is also set to the OFF state (step 046).

  Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (FIG. 10A) is executed (step S047). This first power supply abnormality check process is the same process as step S019 described above.

  Next, various initialization processing is executed (step S048). Here, setting processing to initialize register values etc. in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, interrupt mode setting processing to set a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), interrupt priority setting processing, internal hard random numbers Executes various setting processes at power-on, such as internal hard random number setting process for starting up the circuit.

  Next, the start waiting time of the sub control board (effect control unit 24) is set (step S049). Then, until the sub substrate start waiting time elapses (step S052: 0), the sub substrate start waiting time subtraction process (sub substrate start wait time -1) (step S050) and the first power source abnormality check process (step S051) Is repeatedly executed (step S052: ≠ 0). The start of the effect control unit 24 is completed by the passage of the sub substrate start waiting time.

  If the sub-substrate activation waiting time has elapsed (step S052: 0), the standby screen display command (BA01H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S053). When the effect control unit 24 receives the standby screen display command, it causes the standby effect at power-on to appear using the effect means. For example, the effect image such as "Please Wait" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  Next, while executing the first power supply abnormality check process (step S 054), the process waits for a power-on signal from the payout control board 29 to be sent (steps S 054 to S 055). The power-on signal is a signal that is output when the dispensing control board 29 has risen normally, and the CPU 201 is configured to stand by until the dispensing control board 29 starts up normally. Thus, when the payout control board 29 is not functioning properly due to some trouble, the game operation is not started only by repeating the process of steps S054 to S055. Then, when the above-described power-on signal is confirmed (step S055: ON), the process exits the initial setting process and executes the process of step S012 of the main control side main process of FIG. 8A.

(10-3. Setting change processing: FIG. 11)
Next, the setting change process (step S024) in FIG. 8A will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of setting change processing. This process is a process executed when the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door open sensor 61 are all in the setting change transition state of the ON state (in the case of W (1, 1, 1)). .

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first executes an input data creation process (step S901). In this input data creation process, input information such as the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, the setting key switch 95, etc. is acquired. For example, it is called from the input data creation process (S082 in FIG. 13) in the timer interrupt process. It is supposed to be.

  Next, the setting value Nc (current setting value data) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 is acquired (in the present embodiment, the value of the setting value data is acquired as a setting operation value in a predetermined register) It is determined whether the set value Nc is a normal value (any value of 00H to 05H) (step S903). If the acquired setting value Nc is not any of 00H to 05H (if it is not a normal value), that is, if the acquired setting value Nc does not correspond to any of the setting values 1 to 6 (step S903: NO) Assuming that abnormality (RAM abnormality) has occurred in the set value data, the set value data is initialized (step S904). Here, 00H (setting 1) corresponding to setting 1 is set as the setting value Nc (setting work value) (setting value Nc 00 00H).

  If the setting value Nc is a normal value (step S903: YES), or after the initialization process (setting value Nc ← 00H) is performed on the setting value data in step S904, then, in FIG. The first power supply abnormality check process is executed (step S905).

  Next, a security signal is output from the frame external terminal substrate 21 (step S906), and then a chattering prevention waiting time (for example, about 0.12 ms) is set (step S907). Then, while the subtraction process of the chattering prevention waiting time is executed (step S 908), it waits for the chattering prevention waiting time to elapse (step S 909: NO). In the setting change process of the present embodiment, the process of steps S905 to S916 is repeated at high speed until the setting completion change switch 96 is turned OFF (step S916: YES), that is, whether or not the setting change operation was performed each time, that is, It is determined whether or not the setting change switch 95 has been changed from OFF to ON. However, by providing the chattering prevention waiting time in steps S 907 to S 909, erroneous detection due to chattering of the setting change switch 95 can be prevented. .

  If the chattering prevention waiting time has become 0 (step S909: YES), the input data creation process is executed (step S910), and whether or not the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state, that is, the presence or absence of the setting change operation Is determined (step S911). In this embodiment, when the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 is detected, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed. In the present embodiment, input data creation processing for acquiring input information of the setting change switch 95 is executed not only at step S 910 immediately before step S 911 but also at step S 901 at the start of the setting change processing. This is because, if the setting change processing is started while the setting change switch 95 is kept pressed, even if the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 is suddenly set, the empty detection is performed in step S 910. Thus, the determination process of step S 911 is not affected.

  If the setting change switch 95 is not in the ON state (step S911: NO), it is determined that the setting change operation has not been performed, and the process proceeds to step S915. On the other hand, when the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state (step S911: NO), the current setting value Nc is changed (updated) on the assumption that the setting change operation has been made (step S912). As described above, each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, the setting value at the time of the change operation is switched so as to circulate in the range of the settings 1 to 6. Then, when the process of step S912 is finished, it is determined again whether the set value data is the normal value (step S913), and if it is not the normal value (step S913: NO), the set value Nc is set 1 Setting 00H (setting 1) corresponding to (setting value Nc ← 00H) (step S914).

  Next, based on the current setting value Nc, data for setting display to be displayed on the setting display unit 97 is created and output (step S915). As a result, the setting display 97 displays the current setting value during the setting change operation. The setting value displayed during the setting change operation indicates not the setting information at that time (the value of the setting value data of the setting value storage area) but a provisional setting value before the setting is determined.

  After the process of step S915, it is determined whether the setting change completion switch 96 is in the ON state, that is, whether the setting change operation has been completed (step S916). If the setting change completion switch 96 is not in the ON state (step S916: NO), the process proceeds to step S905 on the assumption that the setting change operation is not completed, and thereafter the process proceeds to step S905 until the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on. The process of step S916 is repeatedly executed.

  If the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on (step S916: YES), the current setting value Nc (setting work value held in the register) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203, assuming that the setting value is decided. At the same time (step S 917), the setting value determination display process is executed (step S 918). In this setting value finalization display process, the current setting display data is cleared, and the lighting finalization data of the setting finalization LED is output. In the setting confirmation LED of this embodiment, when the DP unit (decimal point) of the setting display 97 which is a 7-segment LED takes on the function and the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on, the setting value being displayed disappears , And the DP unit lights up to notify that the set value has been determined.

  Next, the backup flag BF is cleared (step S919), the output of the security signal is stopped (step S920), and the setting change completion command (BA09H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S921). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting change completion command, the setting changing effect being executed is ended, and the setting change completion effect is executed for a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds). For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, and the setting change completion sound (voice such as "setting has been changed ♪") is output from the speaker 16, and "setting has been changed" on the liquid crystal display device 36, etc. The effect image (setting change completion screen) of is displayed. When the setting change operation is performed, the in-area RAM clear process (step S021 in FIG. 8A) is performed. Therefore, instead of the setting change completion effect, an error notification (RAM clear notification effect) corresponding to the RAM clear is performed. You may go. For example, the setting change completion effect may be the same effect mode as the RAM clear notification effect (error notification mode when the in-area RAM clear processing in step S028 is executed). Further, the RAM clear notification effect and the setting change completion effect may be performed in an overlapping manner. For example, on the liquid crystal display device 36, displays such as “setting has been changed” and “RAM is being cleared” can be simultaneously displayed.

  Then, the process waits until the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S922: NO), and when the setting key switch 94 is checked off (step S922: YES), the setting confirmation LED (DP unit) is turned off. Exit the setting change process. Thus, a series of setting change operations are completed. In the present embodiment, the setting change completion effect is produced for a predetermined time (30 seconds) regardless of whether the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control side main processing of FIG. 8A, and a customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S 023).

  After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the front frame 2 is simply opened. Therefore, when the door opening error is configured to be able to be notified in the processing at the time of power on (before entering at least the loop processing of S038 to S041), the door opening error notification (for example, for example, , Switch the decoration lamp 45 to full flashing red and output a door open alarm sound from the speaker 16). This is because it is preferable to notify the setting change completion effect prior to the door opening error in order to notify that a new setting value has been selected and determined (including changing to the same setting value). . In addition, since the setting change completion effect is to notify that the setting change operation has been completed (that the setting value has been changed), an effect different from these, so as not to be confused with the door open error notification or the setting change effect. It is preferable to set it as an aspect (informing aspect).

  By the way, after the setting change operation is completed, a customer waiting command is transmitted following the setting change completion command (step S921, step S023 in FIG. 8A), but the effect control unit 24 ends the setting change completion effect. The customer waiting waiting effect (a customer waiting demonstration screen etc.) is not executed until it is done. In the case of the present embodiment, after the setting change completion effect is finished, a screen at the normal time is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a background image in the normal effect mode corresponding to the normal state is displayed. When a specific combination of symbols (for example, "7" "3" "1") is displayed and a predetermined time has elapsed without a game being started from this display state without the occurrence of winnings etc. in the starting opening (For example, 180 seconds have passed) The customer waiting waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) is executed.

  Although the dedicated setting change switch 95 is provided in the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98 may be configured to be usable as the setting change switch. Furthermore, although the dedicated setting change completion switch 96 is provided in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 94 may be configured to be usable as a setting change completion switch. In this case, the process of step S922 may not be provided, which leads to the reduction of the control load. In addition, a sensor (for example, sensor 33a, 34a, 35a, 42a, 52a, 43a, or 49a or the like) that detects a game ball may function as a setting change completion switch. In this case, in the determination process of step S916, it may be determined that the set value has been determined based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the sensor (on state) by cleaning the game ball to the winning opening etc. .

(10-4. Setting confirmation process: FIG. 12)
Next, the setting confirmation process (step S026) in FIG. 8B will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of setting change processing. This process is a process that is executed when the setting key switch 94 among the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 is in the setting confirmation transition state in the ON state (when W (1, 0)).

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first transmits a setting confirmation command (E021H) to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the command during setting confirmation, the effect during setting confirmation is executed using the effect means (step S 931). For example, an effect image such as “setting in check” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. By the way, when confirming the setting value, first, the front frame 2 is released, and then the setting key switch 94 is turned on (ON state). Here, when the door opening error can be notified, the door opening error notification occurs prior to the effect during setting confirmation. On the other hand, when the confirmation of the setting value is finished, first, the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF (OFF state) first, and then the front frame 2 is closed (the front frame is completed even if the setting confirmation is completed). A door open error has occurred until 2 is closed). That is, from the start of the confirmation of the setting value to the completion of the confirmation, the door open error occurs in any way. Therefore, the notification priority of the setting confirmation effect is set higher than the door opening error notification, and only the setting confirmation effect is displayed while the setting key switch 94 is ON, and the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF again. , You may reveal a door open error. Of course, in order to clarify the door opening error and the fact that the setting confirmation operation is being performed, it may be notified in duplicate that the setting confirmation is in progress and that the door opening is in progress.

  Next, setting value data is acquired from the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 (step S932).

  Next, the first power source abnormality check process (FIG. 10A) is executed (step S933), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 94 is in the ON state (step S934). If the setting key switch 94 is in the ON state, setting confirmation is in progress. In this case (step S934: YES), a security signal is output (step S935), setting value data is acquired from the setting value storage area of the RAM 203, and setting display data is created based on the setting value data (step In step S936, the setting display data is output (step S937). As a result, the current setting value (here, the setting value being determined unlike the setting change processing) is displayed on the setting display 99. Thereafter, the processing of steps S933 to S937 is repeatedly executed until the setting key switch 94 is turned off, that is, the setting confirmation is completed.

  When the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state (step S934: NO), the setting display data is cleared and the setting display displayed on the setting display 99 is displayed as the setting confirmation end processing. While turning off the light (step S938), the output of the security signal is stopped (step S939), and a setting confirmation end command (E022H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S940). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation end command, the effect during setting confirmation is ended. This means that a series of setting confirmation periods have ended.

<13. Main control timer interrupt processing: Figure 13>
Next, timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the main control side timer interrupt process. The main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from CTC at predetermined time intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed while executing the main control side main process.

  In FIG. 13, when the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the second power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, as shown in FIG. 10B, the power supply level supplied from the power supply board is monitored, and when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, the game is restored without trouble at the time of power supply restoration. As is possible, backup processing is performed to store predetermined game information at the time of power interruption in the RAM. Therefore, the power supply abnormality check processing functions as a backup unit. The details of the second power supply abnormality check process will be described later.

  Next, switch input data creation processing is executed (step S082). Input data is created based on input information (ON / OFF signal, rising state (ON edge, OFF edge)) from various sensors and switches. Information detected by the various sensors here is, for example, a winning detection switch (right start port sensor 33a, middle start port sensor 34a, lower right start port sensor 35a, normal symbol start port sensor 37a, upper large winning port sensor 42a, ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal output from the lower large winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, the OUT monitoring switch 49a, and the combination gate sensor 57a, etc., and a switch related to the setting change operation ON / OFF information (operation information) of the switch signal output from the setting key switch 94, the setting change switch 95, the setting change completion switch 96, etc., and the status signal from the payout control board 29 (door open sensor 61 or full) Information of the detection sensor 60).

  Next, an error management process is performed (step S083). In this error management process, whether or not an error has occurred is monitored based on input data relating to various sensors and a status signal from the payout control board 29. If an error occurs, an error process according to the error type is performed. Run. The error processing includes transmission of an error command according to the error type, transmission of an error release command when the error is eliminated, and the like. When the effect control unit 24 receives an error command, the effect control unit 24 executes an error notification according to the error type, and when an error release command is received, ends the error notification in progress.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is executed (step S084). The timer values of various timers (for example, a special symbol combination product operation timer described later, etc.) used for controlling the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are updated (subtracted) here. Details of the timer management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, a timer interruption internal random number management process of periodically updating the random numbers relating to each variable display game is executed (step S085). Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, updating of the random number (+1 addition for each interrupt) and each round of the random number counter with respect to the special symbol determination random number and the auxiliary hit determination random number etc. To change the start value of the random number counter. Note that the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the above random number generation circuit, and is not updated here.

  In the input management process of step S089, based on the input data created in the switch input data creation process (step S082), the winning counter is provided separately for each winning opening, and the OUT ball monitor for counting the number of winnings and counting the number of out balls. Update the counter value etc.

  Subsequently, a winning ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the above-mentioned prize counter is confirmed, and when there is a prize, a payout control command specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When receiving the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the gaming ball payout device 19 based on the winning ball number information included in the payout control command, and executes the payout operation for the designated number of winning balls.

  Then, normal symbol management processing is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management processing, processing necessary to execute the normal symbol variation display game is performed. Here, it is monitored whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for auxiliary collision determination) necessary for the lottery for the auxiliary collision Acquire (general drawing random number acquisition processing), and hold and store the maximum number of holding balls up to the upper limit (general drawing reservation storage processing) as holding data (operation holding ball (general drawing operation holding ball) for ordinary symbols) . Then, when a predetermined variable display start condition regarding the common drawing is satisfied, the drawing per support lottery based on the common drawing operation holding ball is performed, the selection of the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol based on the drawing per selection assistance and the stop display mode of the normal design Determine the (normal stop symbol). In addition, here, in order to make the normal symbol fluctuate and operate, data for LED display for fluctuation display is created if it is during fluctuation, and if it is not fluctuation, data for LED display for stop display is created (usually Symbol display data update process).

  Subsequently, a normal electric role management process is executed (step S092). In the ordinary electric role management process, the process necessary for executing the public use release game is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary winning lottery is a hit, setting processing of data for solenoid control with respect to the normal motorized combination solenoid 41c is performed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the normal motorized combination product solenoid 41c in a solenoid management process of step S100 described later, whereby the open / close operation pattern of the movable piece 47 is controlled Be done.

  Next, special symbol management processing 1 and 2 are executed (steps S093, S094). In the special symbol management processing 1 and 2, processing necessary for executing the special symbol variation display game is mainly performed. The details of the special symbol management process 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and the details of the special symbol management process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a special electric role management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric role management process, a process necessary to control execution of the hit game is performed. Specifically, when a big hit lottery result is won by a big hit 1 to 8 or a small hit, execution control of a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) corresponding to the hit type is selected. In the case of a big hit, start processing of the round game based on the detection signal of the combination gate sensor 57a, execution control of the round game, transition control of the game state after the big hit game end and the like are included.

  Also, here, a plurality of effect control commands are transmitted according to the progress of the hit game. In the case of a big hit, the "big hit start command" at the start of the big hit game, at the start of the round game (when 1R is passing the game ball to the winning gate 57, after 2R when the big winning opening is open) "Command", "round end command" at the end of each round game (when the large winning opening is closed), "big hit end command" at the end of the specified number of rounds (at the end of the last round game), The special winning opening winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. In the case of a small hit, a "small hit start command" is sent to the effect control unit 24 at the start of the small hit game and a "small hit end command" at the end of the small hit game. In response to these commands, the effect control unit 24 controls the appearance of the desired effect (hit effect) according to the progress of the hit game.

  For example, the big hit start command includes information on the current hit type and the gaming state at the time of the hit, and the effect control unit 24 side according to the top hit, back hit, and current hit type. It is used when deciding a series of in-hit production scenarios developed during the big hit game. In addition, the round start command includes the current number of rounds information, and is used when the effect control unit 24 side produces effects according to the number of rounds. In addition, the big hit end command includes information on the current hit type and the game state at the time of the hit, and the effect control unit 24 starts ending effect, and specifies the game state after the end of the hit game. And it is used when deciding the production mode after the game.

  In addition, when the big hit game is over (in the present embodiment, when the ending effect period is over (same for small hit games)), the condition device operation flag, the feature continuous operation device operation flag, the continuous number counter (round number The counter to be counted), special symbol stop 1 flag, etc. are cleared. When the small hit game is over, a small hit middle flag, a special symbol stop 2 flag, etc. described later are cleared.

  Next, a right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, an LED for lighting the right-handed display device 39b when it is under the “right-handed advantageous” gaming state (during hit game, latent state, time saving state, positive changing state) The data is created, and in the case of the "left-hand strike" gaming state (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

  Then, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the composite display device 38c, and the right turn display device 39b is performed. A control signal based on the LED display data created in the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091) or special symbol management process (step S093) is output in this LED management process. As a result, a series of variable display operations (a variable display and a stop display) of a special symbol or a normal symbol are realized.

  Then, external terminal management processing is performed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various external end signals including a large hit medium signal and a variable hit time large hit medium signal are generated through the frame external terminal board 21 to be used as an external device such as a data counter DT or a hall computer HC. Control the output.

  Next, a solenoid management process is performed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric symbol management process (step S092) or the special electric symbol management process (step S094), the ordinary electric symbol solenoid 41c and the special winning opening solenoid 42c, The output control of the excitation signal to 52c etc. is performed. Thereby, the opening and closing operation of the movable piece 47 and the large winning opening 40, 50 is realized.

  Next, performance display monitoring processing is executed (step S101). In the performance display monitor process, the process necessary for displaying the performance information on the performance indicator 99 is performed. The details of the performance display monitor process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the count value of WDT is cleared (step S102). As a result, the WDT is reset and the count value is returned to the initial value.

  After completing the above-described processes of steps S081 to S102, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S103). As a result, the timer interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main control side main process before the interrupt, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<10 B. Second power supply abnormality check process: FIG. 10B>
Next, the second power source abnormality check process (step S081) in FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 10B. FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the second power supply abnormality check process.

  In FIG. 13B, the CPU 201 first acquires a power supply abnormality signal (voltage drop signal) supplied from a power supply substrate (not shown) through an input port (not shown) (step S951). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power supply abnormality signal coincide twice in a row (step S952), and the processes of steps S951 to S952 are repeated until they coincide (step S952: NO). If the levels of the power supply abnormality signal match (step S952: YES), it is determined whether the power supply abnormality signal is at an abnormal level (step S953).

  If the power supply abnormality signal is not at the abnormal level (step S953: NO), the backup flag BF is cleared (step S956), and the value of the power supply abnormality check counter is cleared (step S957), and the second power supply abnormality check process is exited.

  On the other hand, if the power supply abnormality signal is at the abnormal level (step S953: YES), 1 is added to the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (step S954), and the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter after addition reaches the upper limit value Y? It is determined whether or not (step S955). This takes into consideration that acquired data from the input port may be bitized due to noise or the like, and acquired data continuously maintains an abnormal level and the upper limit value Y (for example, , Y = 2), it is determined that the AC power supply is currently shut off.

  If the value of the power supply abnormality check counter has reached the upper limit value Y (step S 955: YES), backup processing is performed on the assumption that a power supply abnormality has occurred. Specifically, the power supply abnormality check counter is cleared to zero (step S958), the firing control signal is set to the OFF state (step S959), and the backup flag BF is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S960). Then, a power off command indicating that a power failure has occurred is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S 961). The power-off command is composed of a power-off A command and a power-off B command each having a length of 16 bits, and is transmitted continuously in this order every eight bits. Adopting such a configuration is to prevent the power interruption status from being erroneously notified to other control units due to the influence of noise or the like.

  Then, the RAM protect is set to be valid, and the prohibited area is set to be invalid (step S 962), and the output data of all the output ports are cleared (step S 963). As a result, data writing to the RAM is prohibited in the subsequent processing. As a result, it is prevented that the RAM is abnormally rewritten due to the reading of the illegal address of the RAM or the like due to the voltage drop, and the payout control board 29 which starts the same kind of power supply abnormality check processing behind the main control unit 20. In contrast, unreasonable data can prevent transmission. Then, after the above backup processing is completed, generation of an interrupt signal is prohibited by setting processing for CTC, and the CPU is set to interrupt prohibition (step S 964), and the power supply voltage drops while repeating infinite loop processing. Wait for the CPU to go inactive.

<14. Timer management process: Fig. 14>
Next, the timer management process (step S084) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the timer management process.

  In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first performs subtraction processing (timer update processing) of a 2-byte timer (step S531).

  In this embodiment, as a 2-byte timer, an ordinary symbol electric combination operating timer that manages the operation time of the normal variation winning device 41 (movable piece 47), an ordinary symbol electric combination operation timer for type testing (general motor for test signal Special symbol 1 operation timer 2 to manage the finalized display time of special symbol 1 Special symbol 2 operation timer 2 to manage the finalized display time of special symbol 2 special fluctuation prize winning devices 42, 52 (open The special electric motorized product operation timer that manages the operation time of the doors 42b and 52b), the error timer that manages a predetermined error notification time, and the like are handled. Here, it is checked whether or not the timer values of these 2-byte timers are zero, and if there is a non-zero timer, the timer value is decremented by one.

  Next, the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is acquired (step S532). This "special symbol 2 operation timer 1" is a timer that manages the variation time of the special symbol 2, and is configured by 3 bytes (3 byte timer). As a timer having the same 3-byte configuration as the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 described above, a "special symbol 1 operation timer 1" that manages the variation time of the special symbol 1 is provided. In this embodiment, a super long fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600000 ms) is adopted as a fluctuation pattern related to a special symbol that can not be measured by a 2-byte timer. Therefore, a 3-byte timer is used as a timer for managing the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation time is set in step SS457 of the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process of FIG. 22 described later (step S417 of the special symbol fluctuation start process of FIG. 18).

  Next, it is determined whether the acquired special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is zero (step S533). If special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is zero (step S533: = 0), the processing proceeds to step S535, and if special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is not zero (step S533:? 0), special symbol 2 operation timer One is subtracted from one (step S534).

(Special figure 1 fluctuation time measurement interruption process at the time of special figure 2 small hit election: S535-S538)
Next, it is determined whether the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S535). The "special symbol stop 2 flag" is a flag for specifying whether the special symbol is "small hit symbol stop and small hit in game", and the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) In the case, it indicates that "small hit symbol stop and small hit in game", and indicates that it is not "small hit symbol stop and in small hit game" when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (For example, refer to steps S483 to S484 in FIG. 24 described later). Here, in the ON state period of the special symbol stop 2 flag, after the variation time of the special symbol is finished and the symbol display mode (small hit symbol) corresponding to the small hit is stopped and displayed, the final display time (500 ms) It refers to the period until the small hit game is over. The special symbol stop 2 flag is cleared at the end of the small hit game in the special electric symbol management process (step S095) described above ((special symbol stop 2 flag 00 00H). However, the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the OFF state Even if it is assumed, the small hit symbol remains stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device until the variation display of the special symbol is newly started, but in this case, the special symbol stop 2 flag is OFF. Since it is in the state, it is treated as small hit symbol non-stop.In this way, the ON / OFF state of the special symbol stop 2 flag is during the fixed display time (for 500 ms after the end of the fluctuation time) to small hit game In terms of whether or not it is a game period, it is referred to as "small hit symbol stop and small hit in game." In the following, small hit symbol stop and small hit in game will be abbreviated as "small hit symbol stop". If you present embodiment, Koatari is (see FIG. 4) has become a big hit-selectable type of special symbol 2 side only, the same applies to the case of providing also Koatari the special symbol 1 side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the special symbol stop 2 flag described above, "special symbol stop 1 flag" is handled as a flag for specifying whether or not a big hit is in progress. It is a flag to specify whether the special symbol is "big hit symbol stop and big hit in game", and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), "in big hit symbol stop and in big hit game" If the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is not "big hit symbol stop and big hit in game" (for example, see steps S493 to S494 in FIG. 25 described later). Here, in the ON state period of the special symbol stop 1 flag, after the variation display of the special symbol is finished and the symbol display mode (big hit symbol) corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed, it passes through the definite display time (500 ms), It refers to the period until the end of the big hit game. This "special symbol stop 1 flag" is also cleared at the end of the big hit game in the special electric role management process (step S095) as in the above "special symbol stop 2 flag" (after the round game of the prescribed round number is over) , Clearing at the end of the ending production time: Special symbol stop 1 flag 00 00H). However, even if the special symbol stop 1 flag is turned off, the big hit symbol remains stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device until the variation display of the special symbol is newly started. However, in this case, since the special symbol stop 1 flag is in the OFF state, it is treated as a big hit symbol non-stop. As described above, it is referred to as "big hit symbol stop and big hit game" in that the ON / OFF state of the special symbol stop 1 flag is the determined display time to the game period during the big hit game. In the following, during the big hit symbol stop and the big hit game is abbreviated as "big hit symbol being stopped".

  If the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S535: = 5AH), the timer management processing is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol stop 2 flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S535: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is acquired (step S536) and the acquired special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is zero It is determined whether or not it is (step S537). As described above, the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is a 3-byte timer that manages the variation time of the special symbol 1.

  If the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is zero (step S537: = 0), the timer management processing is exited without doing anything. If the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is not zero (step S537: ≠ 0), the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is decremented by 1 to update the timer value (step S538), and the timer management processing is exited.

  In this embodiment, in the determination process of step S535, when the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S535: = 5AH), that is, when the small hit is in progress, the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 The timer management process is left without performing the timer subtraction process for. Therefore, during the period when the special symbol stop 2 flag is maintained ON, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the fluctuation display state is maintained without displaying the special figure 1 in the stop display (during the measurement interruption) , Will be treated as 'during display'). As a result, a "small hit time measurement interruption type" simultaneous variation type game machine is realized. In the present embodiment, when one special figure is a big hit, the other special figure will be stopped and displayed with a forced loss symbol, so the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 or the special symbol 2 operation timer during the big hit game There is no provision for timer subtraction (update) processing that targets 1.

<15. Special symbol management process 1: Figure 15>
Next, special symbol management processing 1 (step S093) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process 1.

  Here, in order to make it easy to understand the processing contents of the special symbol management processing 1, first, about the special symbol operation confirmation data in the figure, the special symbol operation status (special symbol 1 operation status, special symbol 2 operation status) I will explain.

  "Special symbol operation confirmation data" is data for specifying a special symbol type to be processed in each processing in the special symbol management processing 1 and 2 (steps S093, S094), and the special symbol operation confirmation data is " If it is zero (00H), specify "Special figure 1" as the process target, and if the special symbol operation confirmation data is "1 (01H)", specify "special figure 2" as the process target . The special symbol operation confirmation data has its value changed to 00H or 01H according to the processing state (see step S301 and step S306).

  Also with "special symbol operation status". This is a status value that specifies the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing status. In the present embodiment, a "special symbol 1 operation status" indicating the behavior of the special view 1 and a "special symbol 2 operation status" indicating the behavior of the special view 2 are provided. The special symbol operation status has four status values of "waiting for customer (00H)", "waiting for waiting (01H)", "changing (02H)" and "determining (03H)" as a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol Is prepared. The above "waiting for customers (00H)" and "while waiting (01H)" indicate that the behavior of the special symbol is in the waiting state for the next change, and the "during change" indicates the change of the special symbol (changes) The indication "during display" is shown, and the above "confirmed" indicates that the variation of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (fixed) (during the special symbol confirmation time).

  Here (α) processing of step S304 and step S309 (processing during special symbol variation), (β) processing of step S305 and step S310 (processing during special symbol confirmation time), (γ) step S331 shown in FIG. 16 described later The processing in step S334 (special symbol variation start processing) is configured as common processing in order to reduce control burden. In this embodiment, the special symbol operation confirmation data, the special symbol operation status, and the like are well coordinated with each other, and the following control is performed on the variation display operation control of the special symbol.

(Processing of the first half in FIG. 15 (processing of the special view 1 side): Steps S301 to S305)
In the process of steps S301 to S305 in the first half shown in FIG. 15, the special symbol operation confirmation data is first updated (set) to 00H as the process for realizing the variable display operation of the special view 1 and "special figure 1" After designating as a processing target (step S301), if the special symbol 1 operation status is "changing (02H)", execute "special symbol changing processing (step S304)" and "determining (03H) If it is, the "special symbol confirmation time processing (step S305)" is executed.

  In the special symbol management process 2 shown in FIG. 16 described later, when the variation start allowance condition is satisfied, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated to 00H, and after “special figure 1” is designated as a processing target (step S329) When the special symbol 1 operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", the "special symbol variation start process (step S331)" in the special symbol management process 2 shown in the figure is executed.

(Processing in the second half (processing on the special view 2 side): Steps S306 to S310)
In the processing of steps S306 to S310 in the second half shown in FIG. 15, the special symbol operation confirmation data is first updated to 01H as processing to realize the variable display operation of the special view 2, and "special view 2" is processed. After specifying (step S306), if the special symbol 2 operation status is "changing (02H)", execute "special symbol changing processing (step S309)" and "confirmed (03H)" In the case, the "special symbol confirmation processing during processing (step S310)" is executed. Then, after the special symbol management process 1 is performed, the process proceeds to the special symbol management process 2 of step S094 of FIG.

  Moreover, in the special symbol management process 2 shown in FIG. 16 described later, when the variation start allowance condition is satisfied, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated to 01H, and after “special figure 2” is designated as a processing target (step S332) When the special symbol 2 operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", the "special symbol variation start process (step S334)" in the special symbol management process 2 shown in the figure is executed.

  In addition, about the details of special symbol variation start processing (step S331, step S334), using FIG. 18 using the details of the special symbol variation processing (steps S304, S309) using FIG. Details of the middle processing (steps S305 and S310) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26A to 26B.

<16. Special symbol management process 2: Figure 16>
Next, special symbol management processing 2 (step S094) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process 2. This special symbol management process 2 is mainly a special symbol change related to the start of variation of the special symbol, in addition to the processing related to holding storage when the gaming ball wins in the starting opening and the starting opening check processing related to pre-reading advance notice (hold addition command). It is structured around the start process.

  In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not there is a prize in the right start opening 33 which is a special view start opening, the middle start opening 34 which is a special view start opening, and the lower right start opening 35 which is a special view 2 start opening. Are sequentially checked (steps S321, S323, and S325).

  If there is a winning on the right starting opening 33 (step S321: YES), the right starting opening check process is executed (step S322), and if there is a winning on the middle starting opening 34 (step S323: YES), the middle starting opening The check process is executed (step S324), and when there is a winning on the lower right start port 35 (step S325: YES), the lower right start port check process is executed (step S326). Details of the “right start opening check process” in step S322, the “middle start opening check process” in step S324, and the “lower right start opening check process” in step S326 will be described later with reference to FIG. The “right start opening check process” in step S322 and the “middle start opening check process” in step S322 in which the special drawing 1 is to be processed are common processes.

  When the processing of step S321 to step S326 is finished, the ON / OFF state of the special symbol stop 1 flag and the ON / OFF state of the special symbol stop 2 flag are sequentially determined (steps S327 to S328).

  If neither the special symbol stop 1 flag nor the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S327: ≠ 5AH, and S328: ≠ 5AH), that is, even if special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 are small hit symbol stop If it is not even during the big hit symbol stop, it is determined that a new symbol variation start condition (execution condition) is established, and processing necessary to start the variation symbol display of the special symbols in steps S329 to S334 is executed. Steps S329 to S331 are processing for the special view 1, and steps S332 to S334 are processes for the special view 2.

  On the other hand, if any one of the special symbol stop 1 flag and the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (step S 327: = 5 AH or S 328: = 5 AH), the new special symbol variation start allowance condition is not satisfied Then, the processing related to the start of variation of the special symbol (special symbol variation start processing) is not executed, the special symbol display data update processing of step S335 described later is executed, and the special symbol management processing 2 is exited.

  In this embodiment, when the variation time of one of the special symbols is ended and the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the processing of steps S327 to S328, the finalized display time start to the end of the hit game is the other The start of the variation display of the special symbol of can be prohibited. Thereby, the variation display of the other special symbol is not started during the final display time of the hit symbol, and the other variation display operation is started although the one special symbol is hit and stopped. It is possible to reliably prevent an inappropriate display state (display operation) that would otherwise be In addition, after the winning game is over, the special symbol stop 1 flag or the special symbol stop 2 flag in the ON state is cleared, and the start of the new special symbol fluctuation display is permitted.

  Then, 00H is set to the special symbol operation confirmation data (step S329), and it is determined whether the special symbol 1 operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)" (step S330). When the special symbol 1 operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)" (step S330: YES), the special symbol variation start process is executed (step S331), and the special symbol 1 operation status is not in standby ( Step S330: NO) Go to the process of step S332. In the special symbol variation start process, the process necessary to start the variation display of the special figure 1 is executed. The details of the special symbol variation management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, 01H is set to the special symbol operation confirmation data (step S332), and it is determined whether the special symbol 2 operation status is "standby (00H or 01H)" (step S333). If the special symbol 2 operation status is on standby (00H or 01H) (step S333: YES), the special symbol variation start process is executed (step S334), and the special symbol 2 operation status is not on standby (step S333) : NO), it progresses to step S335. In the above-mentioned special symbol variation start processing, processing necessary for starting the variation display of the special figure 2 is executed. In addition, step S331 and step S334 are common processing (special symbol variation start processing).

  If it progresses to the process of said step S335, a special symbol display data update process will be performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the special symbol data (special symbol changing) that repeats blinking every predetermined time (for example, 128 ms) Data for display) is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for display during special symbol stop display) is created. The control signal based on the display data of the special symbol created here is output in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 13, and the variation display and stop display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. . As a result, the special symbol management process 2 is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric symbol management process of step S095 of FIG.

<17. Start opening check processing (lower right start opening check processing, right start opening check processing, middle start opening check processing: FIG. 17>
Next, the lower right starting opening check process, the right starting opening check process, and the middle starting opening check process (steps S322, S324, and S326) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the details of the starting opening check process. The start opening check process plays a role as a winning process performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition.

  Here, the lower right starting opening check processing (step S326) is processing for the special figure 2 (symbol variation display game 2), and the right starting opening checking processing (step S322) and the middle starting opening check (step S324). ) Is processing for the special figure 1 (symbol variation display game 1). However, they all have substantially the same processing content, except for the special symbol type to be processed. Therefore, in FIG. 17, the starting opening check processing (right starting opening checking processing, middle starting opening checking processing) targeted for the special view 1 is representatively described, and the starting opening checking processing for the special view 2 A detailed description of (lower right start opening check processing) will be omitted to avoid redundant description unless it is particularly necessary.

  In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first updates the special symbol operation confirmation data to 00H (special symbol operation confirmation data 00 00H) and designates the processing target as the special figure 1, and then the number of operation pending balls, that is, the special figure 1 operation. It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls is the maximum pending storage number (here, the upper limit is 4) (step S351). In the lower right starting opening check process in step S322, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated to 01H (special symbol operation confirmation data +1), and after the processing target is designated as the special figure 2, the special figure 2 operation ball suspension It is determined whether the number is the maximum pending storage number (here, the upper limit is four). As described above, the case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, the case where the processing object is the special figure 1 side will be described below.

  If the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is the maximum pending storage number (step S 351: = MAX), the processing of the later-described step S 363 (command transmission processing for over winning) is executed, and the special view 1 operating pending ball number Is not the maximum pending storage number (in the case of less than 4) (step S 351: ≠ MAX), 1 is added to the special figure 1 actuation pending ball number (step S 352).

  Next, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special view 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S353). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random value is stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203. This reserve storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the symbol variation display game as an operation reserve ball (hold data), and in the reserve storage area, the above-mentioned various random number values as reserve data are special Until the variation display operation of the symbol 1 is performed (until the special symbol variation display game 1 is executed), the reservation condition is stored in the order of establishment of the start condition (winning order). The reserve storage area is provided with a reserve storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special figure 1 reserve storage area and a special figure 2 reserve storage area. In these pending storage areas, pending 1 storage area to pending n storage area (n is the maximum pending storage number: n = 4 in this embodiment) are provided, and each pending data for the maximum pending storage number is stored It is possible.

  Next, prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") which prohibits the pre-reading judgment (prohibits pre-reading notice) is acquired as "winning command data 1" of the lower byte side (EVENT) of the holding addition command (step S354) Then, it is determined whether the "pre-reading prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S355). The "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition which prohibits the pre-reading determination for the operation holding ball. Here, since the special view 1 side is the processing target, it is determined whether or not the read ahead prohibition condition (special view 1 read ahead prohibition condition) targeting the special view 1 operation holding ball is satisfied.

  When the above-described pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied (step S355: YES), the processing of steps S358 to S359 related to pre-reading determination is skipped, and pre-reading determination for the current special drawing 1 operation holding ball is not executed. A hold addition command having prohibited data (EVENT: “9FH”) will be created (see step S360 described later). As a result, the advance notice effect is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the above-mentioned pre-reading prohibition data is data designating that pre-reading determination processing (step S358) is not executed.

  Regarding the pre-reading prohibition condition, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not pre-reading is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, in the case of the normal state and the probability change state in which the winning frequency to the special figure 1 starting opening is high, the pre-reading determination on the special figure 2 side is prohibited and the pre-reading determination on the special figure 1 side is permitted. In the case of the latent state where the winning frequency to the mouth 35 is high, the pre-reading determination on the side of the special view 1 is prohibited and the pre-reading determination on the side of the special drawing 2 is permitted. In addition, during time saving state and big hit game, it prohibits the pre-reading judgment of both special figure 1 and special figure 2. The reason why pre-reading is prohibited in the case of time saving condition is that winnings to the special figure 1 starting mouth frequently occur during time saving condition, but the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is “high speed fluctuation pattern of“ time fluctuation during normal time 1s ” This is because it is scarcely significant to generate a prefetch notice (FIG. 35 (b)). For this reason, while in the time saving state, the prefetching determination of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is prohibited.

  Returning to the description of step S355, when the special view 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S355: NO), the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S356).

<27. Setting error check process: Fig. 27>
Here, for convenience of description, first, the setting abnormality check process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting abnormality check process of step S356.

  In the setting abnormality check process of FIG. 27, the CPU 201 first determines whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH: setting abnormality error in progress) (step S061). If the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S062: = 5 AH), the setting abnormality check process is exited without doing anything. However, if the setting error flag is not ON (step S062: 065AH), the setting value is acquired from the setting value storage area of the RAM 203, and the setting value is normal (00H to 05H corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6). It is determined whether it is any value (step S062). This determination process is the same as the contents of the determination process of steps S 903 and S 913 during the setting change process of FIG. 11, and is a common process. If the acquired setting value is not any of 00H to 05H (step S062: NO), the setting error flag is turned on (5AH) as an abnormality (setting value data abnormality (RAM abnormality)) occurring in the setting value data. ) (Step S063). Then, the setting value abnormality command (0E33H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S064), and the setting abnormality check processing is exited. In addition. When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, the setting abnormality error notification is executed using the effect means. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, and the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a message such as "RAM error, please call a staff member". The setting error (RAM error) is eliminated by performing the setting change operation as described above.

(Modification of setting error check process)
The setting abnormality check process may be executed during the main control timer interrupt process. In this case, it is preferable to execute at least before the special symbol management process of step S093. For example, it is preferable to execute it before error management processing.

  When the setting abnormality check process described above is completed, it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S 357). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S 357: = 5 AH), it is assumed that the setting value data abnormality (RAM abnormality) has occurred, the pre-read determination processing (step S 358) is not performed and the processing of step S 360 described later is performed. move on. Therefore, when the setting value data abnormality occurs, the hold addition command having the prefetch prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (see step S360 described later).

  Although details will be described later, when setting value data abnormality occurs in the start opening check process (process at the time of winning), the pending addition command including the prefetch prohibition data (9FH) is transmitted without performing the RAM error process. It is configured to exit this start opening check process. When the setting value data abnormality occurs, the RAM error processing is performed in the following special symbol variation start processing (processing at the start of variation) of FIG. 18 (see step S411 of FIG. 18).

  On the other hand, if the setting error flag is not ON (step S 357: ≠ 5 AH), that is, if the setting value data is a normal value, pre-reading determination processing is executed (step S 358). In this pre-reading determination process, the big-hit lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is pre-readingly determined, and the pre-reading fluctuation pattern is determined based on the drawing result. More specifically, "prefetch readiness determination processing" to predetermine the winning lottery result at the start of change, "prefetch symbol determination processing" to preread the symbol lottery result at the start of change, and the contents of the change pattern at the start of change A series of processes relating to the pre-reading determination, including the pre-reading determination “pre-reading variation pattern determination process”, is executed.

((A) Winning jackpot random number determination process (pre-reading check process))
In the pre-reading determination process of step S358, first, pre-reading completion determination process is executed. In this pre-reading winning determination process, first, the hit random number determination table corresponding to the special symbol operation confirmation data is acquired, and then the jackpot determination random number value acquired in the process of step S353 is acquired. Then, based on the acquired jackpot determination random number value and the random number determination table, a winning lottery (pre-reading success determination) is performed for the current operation holding ball. That is, the winning lottery result at the start of the change which is executed when the present operation reserving ball is subjected to the change display operation ("big hit determination process (described later (S413 in Fig. 18) described later)""small hit determination process (described later The result (S414) in FIG. 18) is read-ahead judgment, and the result (pre-read result) is acquired.

  In the above-mentioned random number determination table, a special pattern 1 random number determination table (not shown) for the special symbol variation display game 1 and a special pattern variation random number determination table for the special symbol variation display game 2 (see FIG. Not shown). In this process, a random number determination table for either the special view 1 or the special view 2 is selected according to the value of the special symbol operation confirmation data. In these hit random number judgment tables, a judgment value (a winning area according to a high probability and a low probability) for determining a big hit, a small hit (in the present embodiment, only for the special figure 2) and another of loses. It is determined (there is no judgment value (winning area) that a big hit and a small hit will be won at the same time), and it is judged to which judgment value (win area) a random value for big hit judgment belongs. Thus, the hit type is determined according to the current jackpot lottery probability (high probability, low probability). The jackpot lottery probability is, in other words, the operation probability of the condition device.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with tables corresponding to the set values (tables in which at least the winning probability of the big hit differs according to the set values 1 to 6). Further, the ratio of the big hit lottery probability at high probability to the big hit lottery probability at low probability (probability increase rate) is the same in each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the ratio is set to a value that does not exceed 10. For example, in the case of setting 6 related to the random number determination table for special figure 1, in the case of low probability it becomes 1/320, in the case of high probability it becomes big hit with about 1/137, and in case of setting 5, it becomes 1 When / high probability is about 1/142, it is a condition that it is a big hit. Note that the table may not be a different per-random number determination table for each set value, but may be a table common to a part of each set value. For example, the setting 1 and 2 are common, and the setting 3 to 6 is a table or the like in which the winning probability of the big hit is different. In addition, when referring to the common hit random number judgment table with a part of set values, the profit level (outgoing rate of balls) will be the same performance, but in the symbol table described later, set symbol selection rate of hit type The probability may be different for each value. The above-mentioned random number judgment table is also used for processing at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 18).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the pre-read success result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being taken into a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU. This is because the pre-read success judgment result is immediately used in the subsequent pre-reading symbol determination process, and this data is not needed and does not need to be stored in the RAM.

((B) Special stop symbol creation process at winning (pre-reading symbol determination process))
In the pre-read symbol judgment processing, first, “symbol table (big hit symbol table, small hit symbol table or lost symbol table: not shown)” according to the above pre-read hit result (big hit, small hit, different from lose), and step The special symbol determination random number value acquired in the process of S353 is acquired. Next, based on the acquired symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value, symbol lottery (pre-reading symbol determination) is performed for the current operation holding ball. That is, the symbol lottery result at the start of the change (result of "special stop symbol making process (see S 415 in Fig. 18)" described later) to be executed when the current operation reserving ball is subjected to the variable display operation And obtain the result (look-ahead symbol result).

  The above-mentioned big hit symbol table, small hit symbol table, or lost symbol table, the symbol table for the special figure 1 according to the special symbol variation display game 1 and the symbol for the special figure 2 according to the special symbol variation display game 2 It contains a table. In each symbol table, a determination value (winning area) for determining a winning type is defined, and whether or not the special symbol determination random value belongs to any determination value, the special symbol determination data and the special stop The symbol number is determined. In addition, the above-mentioned symbol table is also used in the special stop symbol creating process (step S 415 in FIG. 18) which is the process at the start of the change.

  The above “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying the type of winning, ie, the winning type (symbol type), and specifically, any of 1 to 8 big hits, small hits and lost A to C wins It is data for identifying whether it has been done. The above "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol form to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side. It is used. In this embodiment, for example, even in the case of the same "losing A", the display mode (7-segment display mode) of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b may be different (for example, , "-." In the case of loss A in the special figure 1, "1." etc. in the case of the loss A in the special figure 2).

  In the present embodiment, since the "small hit" is excluded from the big hit lottery target on the side of the special figure 1 (no small hit win), the small hit symbol table for the special figure 1 is not provided. Therefore, with regard to the special figure 1, in the big hit symbol table for the special figure 1, any of the big hit 1 to the big hit 4 is determined at a predetermined symbol lottery rate (see FIG. 4). Is determined by a predetermined symbol lottery rate (for example, loss A is 95%, loss B is 4%, and loss C is 1%). With regard to the special figure 2, in the big hit symbol table for the special figure 2, one of the big hit 5 to the big hit 8 is determined at a predetermined symbol lottery rate (see FIG. 4), and in the small hit symbol table for the special figure 2. The small hit is determined at 100%, and in the lost symbol table for the special figure 2, the lost A is determined at 100%. In the special figure 2 side, since the type of loss is one type of loss A, it is sufficient to simply determine the loss A without providing a loss symbol table (without performing a symbol lottery).

  Moreover, you may provide the symbol table which defined different symbol selection rates according to the setting value about one part or all part of each above-mentioned symbol table. For example, for the big hit symbol table, it is possible to provide a table (in this case, six types of big hit symbol tables corresponding to six levels of set values) in which the selection ratio of the big hit type is different for each setting value 1 to 6 (small hit The same applies to symbol tables and lost symbol tables). For example, if the hit classification on the side of the special figure 1 is representatively described, the symbol lottery rate of the big hit 1 to 4 is set to "3%, 7%, 55%, 35%" in the case of setting 1, and setting 6 In the case of “8%, 12%, 45%, 35%” (The higher the setting, the chance of winning the jackpot 1 (small hit rush (latency state) transition trigger, or jackpot 2 The probability of winning 16R (probable variation) is relatively high). The probability change inrush rate may be constant regardless of the set value, but may be different according to the set value. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 4, the probability change rate is 65% (35% is the time per day), but in case of setting 1, the probability change rate is 60%, and in case of setting 6, the probability change rate is 65%. As a matter of fact, all or part of the set values may have different probability change rates. Similarly, the short time rush rate may be constant regardless of the set value, or may be different in all or part of the set value. With regard to the symbol lottery rate, the probability change rush rate, and the short time rush rate, it is possible to determine that the ball withdrawal performance becomes advantageous to the player as the set value becomes higher.

  Then, the above-described pre-read symbol result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being taken into a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU, as in the above-described pre-read hit determination. This is because the pre-read symbol result is immediately used in the subsequent pre-reading variation pattern determination, and this data is not needed and does not need to be stored in the RAM.

((C) Starting position winning combination random number determination processing (look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination processing))
In the preread variation pattern determination process, first, the preread variation pattern distribution table (not shown) is acquired according to the above-described preread pattern result, and the variation pattern random number value acquired in the process of step S353 is acquired. Subsequently, a fluctuation pattern lottery (prediction fluctuation pattern determination) based on the acquired prefetch fluctuation pattern distribution table and the random number value for fluctuation pattern is performed to determine a prefetch fluctuation pattern. That is, the change pattern at the start of the change (the result of the special symbol change pattern creation process described later (refer to S417 in FIG. 18 described later)) determined when the present operation reserving ball is subjected to the change display operation is read ahead It judges and acquires the result (look-ahead change pattern). In the pre-reading fluctuation pattern distribution table, winning command data 1 (pending addition command (EVENT)) corresponding to the pre-reading fluctuation pattern is determined. That is, the content of the prefetch fluctuation pattern (except for the information on the number of held balls) is designated by the winning command data 1 determined in the prefetch fluctuation pattern determination process. As a result, the winning command data 1 is updated from "9FH" set in step S354 to a data value corresponding to the prefetch fluctuation pattern (step S359).

  The above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern distribution table, there are a plurality of types of pre-reading fluctuation according to the game state and the winning classification (for lost A (special figure 1 · special figure 2 combined), lost B, lost C, big hit 1 to 8) A pattern distribution table is provided, and has a table configuration capable of determining the predictive fluctuation pattern (winning command data 1) by lottery using random number values for fluctuation patterns. For example, in the case where “normal medium SP reach A” (refer to the column of FIG. 35 (i) loss B) is determined as the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation when the current operation reserving ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. Also in the pre-reading fluctuation pattern determination, pre-reading fluctuation pattern information (for example, “03H” as winning command data 1) for designating “normal medium SP reach A” is obtained. In addition, when determining a preread variation pattern, the same variation pattern distribution table as that at the start of variation is not used. This is because the number of operation pending balls at the time of the pre-reading determination does not necessarily coincide with the number of operation pending at the start of the change, so that it is not possible to predetermine the change pattern at the beginning of the change. For this reason, in the determination step of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of operation pending balls. However, even if the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of operation pending balls in this way, it is possible to determine a look-ahead fluctuation pattern in which the contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation do not deviate as much as possible. . In the present embodiment, since the fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 34 to 36) corresponding to the setting value is provided, the above-mentioned prefetching fluctuation pattern distribution table is similarly a table corresponding to each setting value. Is provided. Of course, a table common to each set value may be used.

  The above-mentioned pre-reading fluctuation pattern information (prize command data 1 (EVENT)) is used immediately in the reservation addition command compilation processing of step S359, after that, this data is not required. Therefore, here too, the processing is finished while the result of the prefetch change pattern determination is taken into the register without being stored in the RAM 203.

  After completing the series of prefetching determination processing in steps S358 to S359, subsequently, the lower byte side winning command data 1 (EVENT) obtained by the above-described prefetching variation pattern determination processing, the current number of operation pending balls, and the special symbol Based on the upper byte side winning command data 2 (MODE) based on the type, create a "pending addition command" (step S360), and send it to the effect control unit 24 without storing it in the RAM 203 (step S360) S361). For the data on the MODE side, “B6H to B9H” are set according to, for example, 1 reserve of Special figure 1 to 4 reserve of Special figure 1, and 1 reserve of Special figure 2 to reserve of Special figure 2 "BBH to BEH" are set according to the four. With regard to the data on the EVENT side, the read ahead prohibition data (9FH) acquired in step S354 is not updated in the process of step S359 if it is a read ahead prohibition condition or if the setting value data abnormality occurs. The hold addition command “** 9FH ('**' is any one of B6H to B9H and BBH to BEH)” having the pre-read prohibition data maintained as it is is transmitted.

  Further, in the determination processing in step S351, when the number of operation pending balls is the maximum number of pending storage (4) (step S351: = MAX), it is determined that over winning has occurred, and the command for over winning is displayed as the effect control unit It transmits to S24 (step S363). Specifically, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, when an over winning occurs in the special figure 1 starting opening (the middle starting opening 34 or the right starting opening 33), for the special winning for special drawing 1 The command "B006H" is transmitted. Moreover, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, that is, when the over prize occurs in the special figure 2 start opening (lower right start opening 35), the special prize 2 over prize command "B106H" is transmitted. Be done.

  After the hold addition command or the over prize command is sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 side produces the “prediction notice effect” related to the current operation hold ball. It is only used and not used in the subsequent processing. Therefore, the start opening check process is exited without storing these commands in the RAM 203.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the starting opening check process is ended without storing the various data obtained by the series of prefetch determination processes in step S358 in the RAM one by one. As a result, the memory capacity of the ROM and RAM can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced.

  In addition, in the starting opening check process (process at the time of winning), the pending addition command is transmitted regardless of whether the setting value data is abnormal or not, but the pending addition command has prefetch prohibition data (9FH). Since the command is a command, the effect control itself relating to the advance notice is prohibited. Therefore, no pre-reading notice due to a defect will appear. A configuration for permitting pre-reading advance notice when abnormality occurs in set value data when temporarily adding a reserve command relating to the set value is created or pre-read advance notice effect based on this can be made available Then, due to the abnormal setting value data, there is a risk that the pre-read advance notice effect having a defect, for example, high-prediction pre-read pre-notice or true-prediction pre-read pre-read notice even if it is a loss, may appear silently. However, in the case of the present embodiment, such a problem does not occur because the prefetch notice itself is completely prohibited when the set value data is abnormal. In addition, even in the case where a high-predictive-prediction notice effect with a high expectation degree appears due to a defect, the player can not determine whether or not it is due to an abnormality. For this reason, the game progress is forcibly stopped by the subsequent RAM error processing (step S411 in the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 18 described later), and the high expectation degree advance notice effect disappears. Although the expectation of winning the game held by the player disappears at once, causing a great distrust of the gaming machine, such a problem does not occur in the case of the present embodiment.

<18. Special symbol variation start process: Figure 18>
Next, special symbol variation start processing (steps S331 and S334) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process.

  In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is “00H (special figure 1 is to be processed)” or “01H (special figure 2 is to be processed)” ( Step S401). If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, since the current processing target is the special figure 1, in this case, it is determined whether the special figure 1 operation holding ball is zero or not (step S403). If the operation holding ball in Figure 1 is zero (step S403: YES), execute the customer waiting command transmission process of step S420 described later, if the special view 1 operation holding ball is not zero (step S403: NO) ), The processing at the start of the fluctuation (steps S404 to S419) for the special figure 1 operation holding ball to be provided for the present fluctuation display.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, since the current processing target is the special figure 2, it is determined whether the special figure 2 operation holding ball is zero in this case (step S402) If the special figure 2 operation holding ball is zero (step S402: YES), the "customer waiting command transmission process" of step S420 described later is executed, and if the special figure 2 operation holding ball is not zero (step S402) : NO) The process at the start of the fluctuation (steps S404 to S419) is executed for the special figure 2 operation reserved ball to be provided for the present fluctuation display.

(User waiting command transmission process: step S420)
In step S420, when the special figure 1 is a processing object (special symbol operation confirmation data "00H"), it becomes processing described below. First, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting for customer (00H)". If the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting for customer (00H)", since it is already waiting for a customer, nothing is done, the customer waiting command transmission process is exited, and the special symbol variation start process is exited. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 operation status is not "waiting for customer (00H)", the customer waiting waiting process is executed when the special figure 1 operation holding ball becomes zero. In this customer waiting standby process, "00H is set to the special symbol 1 operation status, and the special figure 1 side shifts to a standby state without a hold (first customer wait state)" special figure 1 zero hold command (BA14H) " Are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Next, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are "waiting for customer (00H)", and if both are "waiting for customer (00H)", all pending The "all hold zero time command (BA04H)" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 after transitioning to the zero customer waiting state (third customer waiting state), and the customer waiting command transmission processing is exited. In the case of the present embodiment, the all pending zero time command is the same command as the customer waiting command (BA04H) transmitted when the power is turned on (see steps S023 and S029 in FIG. 8A).

  Also in the case where the special figure 2 is a processing target, the process contents are almost the same as in the case of the special figure 1 described above. In step S420, when the special figure 2 is a processing object (special symbol operation confirmation data "01H"), it is determined first whether special symbol 2 operation status is "waiting for customer (00H)". If the special symbol 2 operation status is "waiting for customer (00H)", the customer waiting command transmission process is exited and the special symbol variation start process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 operation status is not "waiting for customer (00H)", the above-mentioned waiting for customer waiting process is executed when the special figure 2 operation holding ball becomes zero. In this customer waiting standby process, the special symbol 2 operation status is set to 00H, and the special figure 2 side shifts to a standby state without a hold (second customer wait state) “special figure 2 hold zero time command (BA24H)” Are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Next, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are "waiting for customer (00H)", and if both are "waiting for customer (00H)", all pending The "all pending zero time command (BA04H)" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as it shifts to the customer waiting state of zero, and the customer waiting command transmission processing is exited.

  Here, in the case of "waiting for customers (00H)" which is the special symbol operation status, the reason for leaving the special symbol variation start processing without doing anything is the condition for waiting for customers without a condition when the number of operation pending balls is zero. If it transmits, while the number of operation pending balls is zero, transmission of a demonstration display command will be repeated with a cycle of 4 ms, and unnecessary transmission will occur. Therefore, when the above "No action holding ball" state is reached, the special figure 1, special figure 2, all hold zero time commands are sent once each, and if the demo display command has already been sent, Without transmitting the demonstration display command to the effect control unit 24, the special symbol variation start process is exited.

  When the special effects control unit 24 receives the special figure 1 holding zero time command, the current gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the definite change state, that is, the special figure 1 table fluctuation state (see FIG. 7 (b)). When the special symbol variation display game 1 on the table variation side is not played for the first predetermined time (for example, 59 seconds) or more, transition to the first demonstration state (first normal customer waiting effect mode), and the customer Display a waiting demo screen. At this time, the first demonstration screen is displayed even if the special figure 2 is in motion (during reverse motion). The first demonstration state (first demonstration screen) is continued until at least the special view 1 operation holding ball is generated (may be until the variable display of the special view 1 is started).

  Further, when the special effect control unit 24 receives the special figure 2 hold time zero command, the current gaming state is the latent state, that is, the special figure 2 table fluctuation state (see FIG. 7 (b)), and the second predetermined time If the special symbol variation display game 2 on the table variation side is not played for more than (for example, 60 seconds), the second demonstration state (second regular customer waiting effect mode) is transitioned to and a demonstration screen is displayed. At this time, the second demonstration screen is displayed even if the special figure 1 is in motion (during reverse motion). The second demonstration state (second demonstration screen) is continued until at least the special view 2 operation reserving ball is generated (may be until the variable display of the special view 2 is started).

  Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the all hold zero time command, in this case, since all the operation hold balls are zero, regardless of the gaming state, over the third predetermined time (for example, 61 seconds), When the symbol variation display games 1 and 2 are not performed, the game is shifted to the third demonstration state (third normal customer waiting effect mode), and the demonstration screen is displayed. Note that the third demonstration state (third demonstration screen) is continued in the current gaming state until at least an operation holding ball relating to the front side variation is generated.

  In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the display of the third demonstration screen relating to no hold all the time (after the transition to the third demonstration state), the transition to the “power saving mode (special customer waiting effect mode)” is performed. The power saving mode is a "power saving customer waiting state" in which the gaming machine 1 is controlled to low power consumption. In the case of this embodiment, when the predetermined time elapses (for example, 120 seconds) without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen) after the display of the third demonstration screen (after the transition to the third demonstration state) as the power saving mode transition condition In addition, the power saving mode is to be transitioned. The effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a screen for power saving (for example, the liquid crystal screen displays the character displaying "under power saving") when the power saving mode transition condition is satisfied, except for the button LED 13b. Control is performed to turn off some or all of the lamp 45 and other effect LEDs. In addition, since it transfers to a power saving mode via a demo screen, in power saving mode, button LED13b is already in the operation effective alerting | reporting. However, in the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B, after a game start command (see step S034 in FIG. 8B) is transmitted, the power saving mode is entered when a predetermined time has elapsed. It has become. This is because it is determined that the game start enable state is not ready until the game start command is transmitted from the main control unit 20.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the operation of the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 is detected during the display period of the demo screen (during the demo screen), the “menu screen (game setting It can be switched and displayed on the screen. The switchable timing to the menu screen, that is, the button valid period (operation valid period) in the demonstration screen is notified by the button LED 13 b. In the case of this embodiment, the button LED 13b lights or blinks in a notification mode (for example, orange) different from the normal notification mode (for example, white) as the operation valid notification in the demo screen, and a switchable period to the menu screen is possible. Is notified.

  The first predetermined time, the second predetermined time, and the third predetermined time may be the same time, or some of them (for example, the first predetermined time and the second predetermined time) are the same time. It may be. Further, the display contents of the first demonstration screen, the second demonstration screen, and the third demonstration screen may be the same or different. Further, in the case of the first demonstration screen and the second demonstration screen, the dedicated display area 160 may be displayed preferentially to the demonstration screen to clarify the variation display operation of the special figure during back variation.

  Hereinafter, in the description of steps S404 to S419, the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (in the case of the processing for the special figure 1 operation holding ball in the case of 01H (the special figure 2 is the processing target) is the special figure 2 operation holding The processing is for spheres, but since the processing method is substantially the same, unless there is a need to do so, the case in which Special Figure 1 is the target of processing is described in order to avoid duplicate descriptions. The case where 2 is a processing target is omitted and explained.

  When the process proceeds to step S404, the number of operation pending balls is decremented by 1 (the number of operation pending balls in the special view used for the variable display operation of this time-1: step S404). The subtraction command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S405). Based on this hold subtraction command, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the number of remaining operation hold balls after the current operation hold ball number digestion, and shifts and displays the hold display currently being displayed.

  Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of the steps S406 to S407, pending data (big hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and variation pattern) stored in the pending storage area (pending 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending storage number n = 1 The random number is read out and stored in the judgment random number storage area of the RAM 203, and the pending storage area (pending 2 storage area, pending 3 storage area, pending 4 storage) corresponding to the pending n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) The reserve data stored in area A) is stored in the reserve storage area corresponding to 'n−1', and the reserve 4 storage area is cleared to zero to provide a free area. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number of operation holding balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation holding balls obtained at the starting opening winning combination are any holding memory As well as specifying whether it corresponds to an area, it is possible to store new activated balls for storage.

  Next, gaming state information transmission processing is executed (step S408). Details of the game state information transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, setting abnormality check processing is executed (step S409), and it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S410). The setting abnormality check process of step S409 is the same process as the setting abnormality check process (FIG. 27) of step S356 in the start-up mouth check process of FIG. 17, and the process contents of step S410 are steps during the same process. It is processing common to S357.

(When a setting error does not occur (in the normal case): S410 → S413 processing route)
First, the case where the setting error flag is not in the ON state (in the case of normal operation) will be described, and the case where the setting error flag is in the ON state (when the RAM is abnormal) will be described later.

  When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S410: = 5 AH), the big value determination process of determining whether or not the big hit is performed by transmitting the set value command, and small whether or not small win is determined The hit determination processing is sequentially executed (steps S413 and S414). The set value command includes information that can specify the current set value, and is used when the effect control unit 24 side controls appearance of a notice effect, a setting suggestion effect, etc. based on the set value. The details of the big hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 and the details of the small hit determination process.

(About the presentation aspect related to the setting value)
Since the set value command described above includes set value information, the effect control unit 24 can grasp and manage the current set value from the set value command. In this embodiment, in the notice effect (including the advance notice) and the hit effect, an effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect described later) related to the current setting value can be generated. As a result, it is possible to give the player an inference element for inferring the internal setting value, and the player can enjoy the game while inferring what value the internal setting value is. Further, by realizing the effect corresponding to the setting value, the variation of the effect can be made colorful.

  As the “setting suggestion effect”, for example, “low setting suggestion effect” that suggests low setting (settings 1 to 3), “even setting suggestion effect” that suggests even setting (settings 2, 4 and 6), odd setting "Continuous indication of" Odd setting suggestion effect "that suggests (settings 1, 3, 5)," High setting suggestion effect "that implies high setting (settings 4 to 6), and" notice setting 6 "of the highest setting value There are a “specified 6 fixed effect”, a specified range suggestive effect that suggests setting values of a specific range (for example, set N or more (N <6)), and the like. For example, a specific item image or character image can be displayed, or a specific sound effect or a specific light effect can be displayed to indicate the current setting value. Such a setting suggestion effect can be made to accompany the various advance notice effects such as reach effect, pseudo link, player participation type effect, pre-read advance notice effect and the like.

  In addition, as effects related to setting values, appearance rates of one or more specific preview effects (for example, normal medium SP reach B, SP reach with pseudo 3 etc.) at each setting value or a part of the setting values. Can be different. For example, even if the same fluctuation pattern (for example, medium medium SP reach A) is selected in setting 1 and setting 6, a setting inference factor is generated due to the difference in appearance rate. In addition, for the decorative symbol, the appearance rate of a specific lost symbol pattern (for example, the decorative stop symbol at the time of losing: for example, "2" "2" "4") shall be different for each setting value or a part of setting values. Can. The appearance rate can be determined as appropriate. For example, the appearance rate is set to be a high probability in the order of settings 1 to 6, or different appearance rates are set for setting 1 to 3 and settings 4 to 5 and setting 6, or settings 1 to 3 are set at the same appearance rate 6 can be different appearance rates.

  In addition, setting indication production which uses pre-reading announcement production is possible. For example, the hold display (hold icon) can be changed to an item image for setting suggestion, or a hold icon using a hold color other than the special hold display mode can be displayed (special hold display mode). In this case, it is possible to make the above-mentioned low setting indication effect, the specific range indication effect, etc. appear by using the special hold display mode. In addition, the appearance rate of the special hold display mode can be different for each setting value or a part of the setting values. In addition, the appearance rate of a specific special hold display mode (for example, blue hold color) may be different among the setting values or a part of the setting values without using the special hold display mode.

  Also, a setting suggestion effect is made to appear when the symbol variation display game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 128 games) after power on, or within a specific game number range (for example, between 128 games and 150 games) The appearance rate can be made high probability. Not only after turning on the power, but also after the end of the big hit game, it may be after the big hit end by a specific big hit. In addition, it is also possible to target the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed after the jackpot effect during the big hit game which becomes a transition to the probability change state or the time saving state (latency state non shift) or the big hit game is over. In particular, when the player can not win the transition to the small hit rush even if it becomes a big hit (when the latent state non transition trigger big hit (refer to FIG. 4) is won), the setting suggestion effect is set to increase the player. It is preferable to appear with a higher probability (including 100%) than when it is won in the steady state transition opportunity big hit (or the appearance rate may be 0%). On the other hand, as a bonus that has acquired the transition to the small hit rush (when winning in the latent state transition trigger big hit (see FIG. 4)), when it is elected to the setting suggestion effect, the latent state non transition trigger big hit ( It is preferable to reveal with higher probability (including 100%) than the appearance rate of 0%.

  After finishing the winning lottery of steps S413 to S414, next, special stop symbol creation processing is executed (step S415). The special stop symbol creating process is a process of executing a symbol lottery, and a winning type (hit type) is determined by this process. Specifically, special symbol determination data (winning type (symbol type)) and special stop symbol number are determined. In addition, this special stop symbol creation processing is substantially the same as the "winning special stop symbol creation processing (prefetch symbol determination processing)" described in the pre-reading determination processing (step S358) in the starting opening check processing of FIG. This is the processing content, and here, the symbol lottery at the start of the change is performed.

  Next, a game state transition preparation process is executed (step S416). In this game state transition preparation process, if it is a big hit, necessary setting process is performed to designate the game state after the big hit game end based on the big hit type and the current game state (see FIG. 4).

  Next, special symbol variation pattern creation processing is executed (step S417). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, a variation pattern (FIGS. 33 to 36) at the start of variation relating to the operation reserving ball provided for the present variation display operation is determined. Details of the special symbol variation pattern creation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, command transmission processing at the start of fluctuation (step S418) is performed. In the command transmission process at the start of fluctuation, a "variation pattern specification command" capable of specifying the contents of the fluctuation pattern determined in the above special symbol fluctuation pattern generation process (step S417) is generated and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side Do. In this variation pattern specification command, as variation pattern information, for example, gaming state information, winning lottery result information, variation time of special symbol, presence or absence of pseudo connection (in the case of pseudo connection, the number of pseudo connection), reach effect Containing information about the presence or absence of the reach effect (if the reach effect is present, the type of the reach effect), etc., used by the effect control unit 24 to determine various advance notice effects to appear in the decorative symbol variation display game Ru.

  Further, following the fluctuation pattern designation command, “decorative symbol designation command” is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process (step S 415), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This decoration symbol specification command is composed of two bytes of a high-order byte (MODE) for specifying a special symbol type, and a low-order byte (EVNET) for specifying a big hit type, a small hit type and a lost type. Therefore, the "decorative symbol specification command" includes information on the special symbol type and the winning type (design lottery result). Since the decoration symbol designation command includes the winning type information, the effect control unit 24 mainly uses the combination of the decoration symbols (reach symbol) when forming the reach state, and the decoration symbol to be finally displayed by stopping. It is used when deciding the combination of (decorative stop pattern). In addition, since the fluctuation pattern designation command includes at least the winning result information and the fluctuation pattern information, the effect control unit 24 generates an advance notice effect mode according to the symbol fluctuation display game based on the fluctuation pattern designation command. Also, it is possible to determine a stop decoration symbol and execute a symbol variation display game.

  And as a change start time setting process, it switches to the special symbol operation status "during variation (02H)" (stores 02H in the special symbol operation status), turns on the variation flag of the special symbol type to be processed this time (5AH Storage) and clears the determination random number storage area to zero (step S419). The above-mentioned "flag during fluctuation" is a flag indicating whether the special symbol is in motion, and indicates that the display operation of the special symbol is in motion when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH). When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is in the stop display mode. In the present embodiment, the "special symbol 1 variation in progress flag" corresponding to the special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 variation in progress flag" corresponding to the special figure 2 are handled. Here, since the special figure 1 is described, the special symbol 1 in motion flag is turned ON, and the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "in motion (02H)".

(When a setting error occurs (RAM error): S410 → S415 processing route)
Returning to the description of step S410, when the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S357: = 5 AH), the processing of steps S413 to S414 related to the winning lottery is skipped on the assumption that the setting value data abnormality has occurred, and step S415. Execute special stop symbol creation processing of.

  In the present embodiment, the winning lottery is not executed when the setting value data abnormality occurs. In the previous symbol variation display game, when the player wins a big hit or a small hit, the big hit determination flag indicating the hit win and the small hit determination flag are cleared (00H) at the end of the symbol change display game. (See steps S505 and S511 in FIG. 26A described later). Therefore, when the winning lottery process of steps S413 to S414 is not executed in the symbol variation display game this time, the winning lottery result is always "lost".

  In the special stop symbol creation process of step S415, the symbol lottery is executed based on the fact that the result of the winning lottery is "loss". In the case of a setting abnormality error, the loss type may be determined using a loss symbol table as usual, but a loss dedicated to an error may be determined. For example, in the present embodiment, although “lost A to C” are provided, it is possible to provide “missing D ′” which is not normally selected as a lost for a setting error (error type for missing).

  Next, special symbol variation pattern creation processing is executed (step S417). Details of the special symbol variation pattern creation process at the time of the setting abnormality error will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when the special symbol variation pattern creation processing is finished, the processing in steps S418 and S419 is executed, and the special symbol variation start processing is exited.

  When the special symbol variation start process is ended as described above, the special symbol display data update process of FIG. 16 (step S335) is performed, and thus the variable symbol display of the special symbol is started.

(Modification example when a setting error occurs)
In the above embodiment, when a setting abnormality error occurs, it is a process of skipping the winning lottery (big hit determination processing, small hitting determination processing), but it is not only the winning lottery but also the symbol lottery (step S415), the fluctuation pattern lottery (step Steps S415 to S419 including S416) may be skipped to leave the process without doing anything. In other words, the special symbol management process is ended without starting the symbol variation display game. In this case, since no variation pattern designation command or decoration symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, it is preferable to control the game to an impossibility state, assuming that a RAM error has occurred. For example, when a RAM error occurs, at least data transmitted to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in order to explicitly notify that the game progress has stopped (the special symbol variation display game is not being executed). Clear In addition, during this RAM error, it is preferable not to execute at least the processing of the normal symbol management processing (step S091) to the special electric power symbol management processing (step S095) as processing related to the symbol variation display game. Since the performance display monitor process (step S101) is a process belonging to the out-of-area memory side, the process may be executed even if a RAM error occurs.

<19. Game state information transmission process: FIG. 19>
Next, the game state information transmission process (step S408) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the details of the gaming state information transmission process.

  In FIG. 19, first, the CPU 201 executes variable command transmission processing (step S425). In this variable command transmission process, first, the current special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are acquired, a variable command is created, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

  The "variable command" is made up of 2 bytes, and the upper byte side data (EEH: MODE) specifying that it is a variable command and the special figure that can specify the behavior of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 It is composed of lower byte data (EVENT) including behavior information. In the lower byte (EVENT) data, the upper 4 bits are the special figure behavior information (“1 * H” to “3 * H”: * is 1 to 3) of the special figure 2 and the lower 4 bits are the special Diagram behavior information (“* 1H” to “* 3H”: * is 1 to 3), and combinations of these specify the behavior of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. For example, “EE11H” indicates “waiting for special figure 2 and waiting for special figure 1”, and “EE12H” indicates “waiting for special figure 2 and special figure 1 fluctuating”, and “EE13H” If there is, it indicates "during special figure 2 waiting, special figure 2 fixed". The special figure behavior information included in the command during fluctuation is the effect display of the fourth symbol 157 and the fourth symbol 159 of the dedicated display area 160 on the effect control unit 24 side, the effect display between the table fluctuation state and the back fluctuation state It is used when switching the

  Next, a state command transmission process is executed (step S426). The state command includes gaming state information capable of specifying at least the current gaming state, but in the case of the present embodiment, in addition to the current gaming state, big hit number information (first hit / big hit number information during consecutive calls), The status command including the remaining time short information, the remaining ST number information, etc. is transmitted. The information included in the state command is used on the effect control unit 24 side for transition control of the effect mode or for a notice effect lottery, or for displaying the remaining number of times on the liquid crystal screen or displaying the number-of-times-in-a-number information. Then, when the state command transmission is completed, the game state information transmission processing is exited.

<20. Big hit judgment processing: Figure 20>
Next, the big hit determination process (step S413) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot determination process.

  In FIG. 20, first, the CPU 201 sequentially determines the states of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag and the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag (steps S431 and S432). The special symbol 1 big hit determination flag and the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag are flags for specifying whether or not the big hit is won, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the big hit is won In the case where the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the jackpot is not won (in the jackpot non-winning state). As the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag or the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag, 5AH (winning) or 00H (non-winning) is set based on the winning lottery result (the winning lottery result regarding the big hit) of step S436 described later. When the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag or the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), it is triggered by the end of the symbol variation display game (correctly, the variation display of the special symbol is over and the definite display time elapses after At the time) zero clear (special symbol big hit judgment flag 00 00H) is performed (see step S505 in FIG. 26A described later).

  If either the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag or the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (the determination result of step S431 or S432 is '= 5 AH'), ie, when the special figure 1 starts changing When FIG. 2 is a big hit, or when the special figure 1 is a big hit at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2, nothing is done and the big hit determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when both the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag and the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag are in the OFF state (00H) (the determination result of step S431 or S432 is '≠ 5AH'), the above according to the special symbol operation confirmation data A hit random number determination table (not shown) is acquired (step S433). The hit random number table is the same as the table used in the winning combination jackpot random number determination process (pre-fetch win determination process) during the pre-read determination process (step S358 in FIG. 17).

  Next, the jackpot judgment random number stored in the judgment random number storage area is acquired (step S434), and a hit lottery based on the jackpot judgment random number and the random number judgment table is performed (step S435: random number judgment processing). The result is stored in the big hit determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S436). However, here, the hit of the big hit is determined, and the hit of the small hit is performed in the subsequent small hit determination process (step S414). As a result, the big hit determination processing is exited, and then the small hit determination processing is executed.

(About normal lottery (with big hit with lost lottery), with big hit without lottery (with big hit without lottery))
In addition to the above big hit determination process, if the current determination target is the special figure 1 operation holding ball, if the other special figure 2 is already in the big hit elected state when executing the big hit determination process (step S432: Special symbol 2 big hit judgment flag = 5AH), Do not execute the hit judgment of its own big hit (step S435), it exits the present big hit judgment processing. Also, even when the special processing target of the special processing 2 operation holding ball this time is, while the other special drawing 1 is already in the big hit election state (step S431: special symbol 1 big hit judgment flag = 5AH), its own The big hit determination process (step S435) is not executed, and the present big hit determination process is ended. That is, when it is determined that one of the special symbols is a big hit (when the result of the symbol variation display game is considered a big hit), when performing a winning lottery relating to the other special symbol, the big hit is drawn It is controlled in the "big hit no lottery state (special lottery state: hereinafter abbreviated as" no lottery ") of excluding from the object, that is, not performing the drop judgment of whether it is a big hit or not. Therefore, as a result of the other symbol variation display game under the big hit no lottery, a result other than the big hit, that is, 'loss' or 'small hit' will be derived. In the case of the present embodiment, when the special drawing 1 side lottery is executed, if the special drawing 2 side is a big hit, the special drawing 1 side lottery result is "loss" and the special drawing 2 side In the case where the special lottery 1 side is a big hit when performing the final draw, the special lottery result of the special figure 1 side is "small hit or lost".

<21. Small hit judgment processing: Figure 21>
Next, the small hitting determination process (step S414) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the small hit determination process.

  In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines the special symbol operation confirmation data (step S441). If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S441: = 00H), the small hit determination processing is exited without doing anything. This is because the big hit lottery object of the special figure 1 side does not include a small hit. Therefore, when a small hit is included in the big hit lottery object of the special figure 1 side, processing of the below-mentioned step S442-S445 should be executed.

  When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (step S441: = 01H), the special figure 2 random number judgment table is acquired (step S442), and the big hit judgment random number value stored in the judgment random number storage area is obtained (Step S443).

  Then, a winning lottery is performed based on the jackpot determination random number value and the random number determination table (step S4444: random number determination processing), and the result is stored in the small hit determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S445). Here, as a part of the winning lot, it determines the hitting of the small hit. In addition, when it is not elected in the big hit or the small hit, this hit lottery result becomes loss.

<22. Variation pattern creation process: Fig. 22>
Next, the variation pattern creation process (step S417) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the details of the fluctuation pattern creation process.

  In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first acquires the "variation pattern distribution table selection table" shown in FIG. 33 (step S451), and then the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special figure 1 is to be processed). It is determined whether there is any or 01H (special figure 2 is a processing target) (step S452). In the variation pattern distribution table selection table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the current gaming state (YJ), the winning type (special symbol determination data), the special symbol big hit determination flag (normal lottery, no lottery different) Variation pattern allocation table (FB1 to FB16 (for big hit), FH1 to F5) which are associated with the number of activated holding balls (the number of activated holding balls minus the amount of digestion this time: 0 to 3) FH 25 (for lost) is specified.

  If the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, the special figure 1 is to be processed (step S452: = 00H), the current game state is referred to with reference to the variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. (YJ), the winning classification (special symbol judgment data), the state of the special symbol 2 big hit judgment flag, and the variation pattern distribution table according to the special figure 1 operation holding ball number etc. (for big hit in FIG. 34 or in FIG. 1) is acquired (step S453B).

  On the other hand, if the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, that is, the special figure 2 is to be processed (step S452: = 01H), the current variation pattern reference table shown in FIG. 33 is referred to. Variation pattern distribution table (Figure 34 (for big hit), Figure 36 (for big hit) according to the game state (YJ), winning classification (special symbol determination data), the state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag, and the special figure 2 operation suspension ball number (Special figure 2 lost / small hit)) is acquired (step S453A).

  Subsequently, the variation pattern random number (the size of the random number value: 10000) is acquired, and the variation pattern is selected with reference to the variation pattern allocation table acquired in the process of step S453A or step S453B (step S455). In the variation pattern allocation table, as shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a determination value (winning area) corresponding to the variation pattern is defined, and any variation pattern is determined at a predetermined selection rate. It has become so. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern distribution table FB1 of FIG. 34, the selection ratio of “normal fluctuation direct hit” is 200 / 10,000, middle N reach 1 is 80 / 10,000, ..., RUSH direct hit reach 2600 / 10,000. And, usually from the fluctuation direct hit ~ ~ RUSH direct hit any one of the fluctuation pattern is to be determined by the lottery. When the variation pattern is determined, command data on the upper byte side (MODE) and the lower byte side (EVENT) for forming the “variation pattern specification command” is determined. The fluctuation pattern designation command itself is created by the process of step S418 of FIG. 18 following and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

  Further, along with the determination of the variation pattern, a variation time table (not shown) corresponding to the variation pattern is also determined (step S456). In this "variation time table", the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined, and the fluctuation time is determined with reference to the fluctuation time table.

  Then, the fluctuation time determined in step S456 is set to the special symbol operation timer 1 corresponding to the current special symbol operation confirmation data (step S457). If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, set the variation time to the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 of the special figure 1, and if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 of the special figure 2 Set the fluctuation time.

  By the above, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is exited, and the command transmission process (step S418) at the start of variation shown in FIG. 18 is executed.

(22-1. Variation pattern distribution table selection processing for special figure 2: steps S453A to S455)
Here, the variation pattern assignment table selection table and the variation pattern assignment table, which are characteristic elements of the present invention, will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, first, a case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (step S452: = 01H), that is, the case where the current processing target is the special figure 2 operation reserving ball will be described.

  In the process of step S453A, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33, but especially in the 'latency state' in which the special figure 2 is in the table fluctuation state If the result is "No A (special figure 2 reserve 0 loss A, special figure 2 reserve 1-3 loss A) or small hit (special figure 2 reserve 0 small hit, special figure 2 reserve 1-3 small hit)" In addition, according to the ON / OFF state of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag, the variation pattern distribution table which can be selected is different. In other words, the variation pattern distribution table that can be selected is different depending on whether or not the special figure 1 side has won the big hit.

  Specifically, referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33, when the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is not in the OFF state (00H), that is, the other special figure 1 is not winning a big hit " In the case of the jackpot non winning condition (special figure 1 loss variation), one of the variation pattern distribution tables “FH9 to FH12” in the “normal lottery” column shown in the same figure is selected. It has become. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, when the other special figure 1 is "big hit elected state (special figure 1 big hit fluctuation)" where the big hit is won, the same One of the variation pattern allocation tables “FH13 to FH16” in the “No lottery” column shown in the figure is selected (“Pending 0 loss A for the special symbol type column“ Special figure 2 ” ~ Refer to the fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the reservation 1-3 small hits'). In addition, in the case of 'normal state, time saving state and definite variation state' in which special figure 2 is in reverse fluctuation state, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH7” is selected regardless of the state of the special symbol 1 big hit judgment flag It is supposed to be

  As described above, when the current processing target is the special figure 2, it is determined whether the other special figure 1 wins the big hit (special symbol 1 big hit judgment flag ON, OFF state: big hit hit drawing of special figure 1 The reason why the result is defined as one of the selection conditions of the variation pattern is as follows.

  In the case where the processing target of this time is the special figure 2 side, when the other special figure 1 has already been won by the big hit, the big win lottery of the special figure 2 (step S435 in FIG. 20) is not executed. Therefore, the current winning lottery result is either "losing" or "small hitting" forcibly (see FIG. 20, FIG. 21), and the symbol lottery result (step S415 in FIG. 18) is "losing A" or It will be either a "small hit". In the following, the case where a big hit critical lottery is executed is referred to as "normal lottery time", and the case where the big hit critical lottery is not executed is referred to as "no lottery time" or "forced lost time".

  Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, the current gaming state will be described as "during a latent state (special figure 2 table fluctuation state)" where a small hit rush occurs.

  During the latent state, a high speed fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 2s to normal fluctuation 4s) in which the fluctuation time width of the special symbol is 2 seconds to 4 seconds is selected with high probability (see FIG. 36). Such a "high-speed fluctuation state" is a gaming state that emphasizes mainly the game characteristic "increase the average game speed of the game and increase the time efficiency regarding the progress of the game (increase the withdrawal speed)". It is useful. In particular, in a low probability state where small hit lashes occur, many players want to pile up balls quickly in a short time and want to enjoy the feeling of increasing speed of balls, and the high speed fluctuation state is suitable for such gaming state It is.

  On the other hand, when selecting a fluctuation pattern, in order to get a sense of winning expectation to a big hit, reach fluctuation designating reach production, and pseudo reciprocity fluctuation designating pseudo ream are moderately intertwined, and sorrow production is monotonically It is necessary to devise not to Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, a variation pattern distribution table “FH9 to FH12” (see “latency (normal lottery)” column for the normal lottery shown in FIG. 36 (with special figure 2 big hit hit lottery)). As described above, a variation pattern for designating a notice effect (for example, high expectation degree notice effect) having a high degree of resemblance is included in the selection target. Specifically, the fluctuation time is relatively long "Late-Medium-Low SP Reach (Variation Time 30 Seconds)" or "Late-Measure Strong SP Reach (Variation Time 40 Seconds)" or "Tall Avoidance Reach Gasse (Variation Time 20 Seconds" "High expectation degree notice production such as high expectation degree notice production (for example, SP reach etc.) Special notice production asking whether or not to reach with 7 symbols (small hit rush transition decision design) (fall avoidance reach casee) , And a variation pattern for causing a player participation type effect etc. to appear.

  However, under the situation where there is no lottery, as in the above-mentioned conventional variation pattern selection technology, if a variation pattern specifying a notice effect with a high degree of excitement is included in the selection target, only a loss or a small hit will be won. Nevertheless, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected indiscriminately, leading to a gaming situation in which the progress of the game is unnecessarily delayed. In addition, under the situation at the time of no lottery, the high expectation degree advance notice effect also only senses the player's sense of tension etc. meaninglessly, and the significance of causing the effect to appear is scarce.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regarding the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. 33, it is possible to select the fluctuation pattern distribution table according to whether it is a normal lottery time or not. Here, it is described that the current gaming state is the latent state, so in the case where the other special figure 1 is 'big hit non-winning state (special figure 1 fluctuating)' The variation pattern distribution table “FH9 to FH12 (refer to the column of“ Lattely confirmed, normal lottery ”shown)” is selected for the special pattern 2 big hit hit lottery), and the 'big hit is in progress' In the case of 'big hit fluctuation', the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH13 to FH16 (refer to the column of“ latency, not drawn time in the figure) ”for no lottery time (special figure 2 big hit no lottery) is selected Be done.

(22-1-2: About the feature of the variation pattern assignment table for no lottery)
As shown in FIG. 36, the “no-lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH9 to FH12” have the following features as compared with the “normal lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH13 to FH16”. I'm sorry. When referred to below as "not selected", it may be either the case where "the variation pattern lottery is performed but the selection rate is 0%" or the case where it is "excluded from the lottery object".

(E) At least the reach fluctuation pattern is not selected. In the case of the present embodiment, only the normal fluctuation pattern having a relatively low probability of winning is selected without selecting the reach fluctuation pattern and the pseudo connected fluctuation pattern (for example, see tables FH13 to FH16). Therefore, a player participation type presentation requiring a relatively long presentation time range, a reach presentation, and other notice presentation effects with a high degree of excitement, that is, high expectation degree notification effects are not produced. In particular, when the reach fluctuation pattern is not selected, the appearance rate of the reach effect can be zero. Note that the selection rate of the reach variation pattern may be relatively low. (F) The selectivity of "short fluctuation pattern" (for example, normal fluctuation 2s, normal fluctuation 3s, etc.) having a relatively short fluctuation time is high. In other words, the selectivity of the "long fluctuation pattern" in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is low. Therefore, also in this case, as in the case of (W) described above, the high expectation degree advance notice effect is not or is unlikely to be realized. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the selectivity of the shortest normal fluctuation 2s is high (for example, comparison between “FH10 and FH14” and “FH12 and FH16”). Therefore, the configuration in which the variation pattern distribution table is switched between the non-lottery time and the normal lottery time is lower than the case where the variation pattern distribution table is switched between the non-lottery time and the normal lot time The average speed of digestion per game will be increased.
Simply speaking the above (W) and (F), the fluctuation pattern distribution table for no-lottery is a fluctuation pattern in which the expectation for winning a jackpot is relatively lower than that for a regular lottery. Is a table configuration that is easy to select. As a result, when there is no lottery, a low expectation forecasting effect with a relatively low probability of winning is more likely to appear (when the appearance rate becomes a high probability) than in the regular lottery. It becomes difficult to do it (the appearance rate becomes low probability).

(Modified example of variation pattern distribution table for no lottery)
In addition, in the case of no lottery, as described above, focusing on the technical idea that “it is difficult to make high expectation notice effect appear” or “not to show high expectation notice effect”, as described below It may be a table configuration.

(Y) In the case of no lottery, it does not say "do not select reach variation pattern" as described above (W), but N reach specification variation pattern is selected, but SP reach specification variation pattern is It is good also as a table composition of not selecting (it does not select the reach change pattern of SP reach specification at least among reach change patterns). This is because the N reach type (for example, N reach under latent) has a shorter fluctuation time and the probability of winning is lower than that of the SP reach type (for example, under low reach or low SP reach). In this case, "super heat notice effect (for example, strong SP reach)" having a relatively high degree of expectation among high expectation degree advance notice effects (for example, SP reach) will not appear.
(Yo-1) Further, among the variation pattern types at the time of losing, it may be configured not to select the variation pattern having the highest expectation of winning. For example, in the case of under-probability, "normal fluctuation 2s to under-permanence weak SP reach, fall avoidance reach cassette" other than under-probable-to-strong SP reach can be selected. In this case, the extreme heat advance rendition is not or hardly appeared. That is, this example is a form which does not exclude even the appearance of the intense heat advance announcement effect.

  (T) At the time of no-lottery, the "no-lottery variation pattern distribution table" may be used for both the case of loss and the case of small hit. For example, there are no "FH 13 (for holding zero), FH 14 (for holding number 1 to 3)" for loss A, "FH 15 (for holding zero) for small hit, FH 16 (number of holdings 1 to 3) ) Can also be used.

  (V) At the time of no lottery, a table which does not depend on the number of operation pending balls may be used. For example, regardless of the special drawing 2 operation pending number, "FH14" can be used in the case of the loss A, and "FH16" can be used in the case of a small hit. In this case, the configuration may be such that "FH14" or "FH16" is used for both the loss A and the small hit.

(F) Moreover, as shown in FIG. 36, the “non-lottery variation pattern allocation tables FH11 to FH12” according to this embodiment are the same as “variation pattern distribution tables FH13 to FH16 for regular lottery”. Although the pattern is defined, the present invention is not limited to this. The “normal lottery variation pattern distribution table” and the “no-lottery variation pattern distribution table” can define variation patterns of partially different types or variation patterns of entirely different types. Specifically, it can be set as the following (so-1)-(so-2) composition.
(S-1) In the "normal lottery variation pattern allocation table", as shown in FIG. 36, a variation pattern of "normal variation 2s to fall avoidance reach cassette" is defined. However, in the "no-lottery variation pattern assignment table", it is possible to define a variation pattern which is different in part or all from these. For example, one or a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be defined as fluctuation patterns dedicated to no-lottery. Specifically, prepare a fluctuation pattern “normal fluctuation 2s without fluctuation for 2 seconds (fluctuation time 2 seconds)” or “N reach without lottery” etc. that do not correspond to any of normal fluctuation 2s to fall avoidance reach cassette. In the fluctuation pattern distribution table for lottery, four types of normal fluctuation 2s to normal fluctuation 4s (common to normal lottery time) and non-lottery normal fluctuation 2s (non-lottery exclusive) may be defined, or no lottery Only the normal fluctuation 2s may be defined. In addition, when it is set as the structure which can select a reach change pattern, you may further include "N reach for no lottery". In any case, the non-lottery variation pattern distribution table has a table configuration in which a variation pattern having a relatively lower expectation of winning to a big hit is easier to be selected than the normal lottery variation pattern distribution table. can do.
(S-2) When a variation pattern dedicated to no-lottery selection is selected, a preliminary announcement effect that suggests or conclusively announces that the result of the symbol variation display game on the back variation side is a big hit is displayed as the preliminary announcement effect It can be done. That is, it is possible to cause the main effect side on the surface fluctuation side to make an advance notice effect regarding the game result on the back surface fluctuation side.

  (Tsu) In addition, at the time of no lottery, it is always lost or small hit winner, so in any case of the above (W)-(S-2) of course, we will definitely notify the big hit winning Although the exact effect is not shown, the precise effect of announcing a small hit may appear.

(About the other reason to set the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the time of no lottery)
By the way, there is also the following advantage with regard to the above-mentioned point that the configuration in which the fluctuation pattern distribution table is switched between the non-lottery and the normal lottery speeds up the average digesting speed per game. The details will be described below.

  If the special processing target of this time is special drawing 2, and the other special drawing 1 is elected as a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of special drawing 1 is selected as "fluctuation in every 4 minutes in the latent order" (play in FIG. 34) "Special figure 1, common A (big hit 1 to 4 common (shared) meaning) column" FB5 "corresponding to the column of the status type" latency confirmation "(see). Therefore, it takes up to 240 seconds until the big hit fluctuation of this special figure 1 ends.

  Here, that special figure 1 is elected as a big hit means that if the big hit type is big hit 1 (selectivity 5%) or big hit 2 (selectivity 10%), it will re-enter into the latent state and again It is a small hit rush, but there is a possibility that the big hit 3 or 4 is won (in the case of this embodiment, the fall probability from the latent state is 85% (50% selectivity of the big hit 3) And the jackpot selection rate of 35%) is high (see FIG. 4)). It should be noted that in the case of the latent state, the special figure 1 side is the reverse fluctuation state (see FIG. 7), and in the presentation, it is not notified which of the big hit 1 to 4 the big hit is won, the player side For the reason, there is no clue as to whether the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is a big hit fluctuation or a lost fluctuation.

  However, in the gaming situation, in any case, under the critical situation that the "small hit rush" is ended by the big hit of the special figure 1. In particular, when the jackpot 3 or the jackpot 4 is internally elected, since it is not the latent transition opportunity jackpot, it receives more jackpot lottery in the special figure 2 until the fluctuation of the special figure 1 ends. Whether the player can win more small wins will greatly affect the future player's profit.

  However, even if the special figure 2 side is in a no-lottery state, if the long variation pattern of several tens of seconds to a minute order is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2, the lottery on the special figure 2 side The chances of being received will be lost for the fluctuation time, which will greatly affect the profits that the player receives during the small hit rush.

  However, as in the present embodiment, if the variation pattern allocation table (FH13 to FH16) only for no lottery in FIG. 36 is selected at the time of no lottery, the short variation pattern is selected, so the player Will not be disadvantaged, and will be given a beneficial game development for the player.

(22-2. Variation pattern distribution table selection processing for special figure 1: steps S453B to S455)
Next, the case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S451: 00H), that is, the case where the current processing target is the special view 1 operation holding ball will be described.

  In the process of step S453B, the variation pattern assignment table is determined with reference to the variation pattern assignment table selection table of FIG. 33 as in the above-described special view 2, but the special symbol 2 big hit decision flag is ON here The variation pattern assignment table that can be selected is different according to the OFF state. In other words, the variation pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on whether or not the special figure 2 side is winning the big hit.

  Specifically, referring to FIG. 36, special symbol 2 big hit judgment flag in the case where the special drawing 1 is one of the table fluctuation state and the symbol lottery result is "lost A to C" in the "certain change state". If the flag is not OFF (00H), that is, if the other special figure 2 is in the big hit non-winning state (special figure 2 lost fluctuation), “for normal lottery (special figure 1 big hit hit lottery) In the case where the variation pattern distribution table “FH17 to FH20 (refer to the column of“ probable change, normal lottery ”shown)” is selected, and the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, the other When special figure 2 is in big hit winning state (special figure 2 big hit fluctuation), fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH21-FH24 (not shown) for no lottery time (special figure 1 big hit hit lottery not shown) shown in the same figure. "A certainty, see no lottery" column) It is adapted to the target-option. In the case of 'latency state' in which the special figure 1 is in the reverse fluctuation state, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH 8” is selected regardless of the state of the special symbol 2 big hit judgment flag. ing.

  Thus, even if the special processing target of this time is special figure 1, the special symbol 2 big hit judgment flag of the other special figure 2 ON and OFF state (big hit hit lottery result) is one of the selection condition of fluctuation pattern The reasons for this are as follows.

  If the special processing 1 is the current processing target, and the other special drawing 2 is a big hit, the big drawing of the special drawing 1 is not executed, and the result of the drawing is forced to be lost. (Refer FIG. 20, FIG. 21). Therefore, the symbol lottery result (step S415 in FIG. 18) is one of the loses A to C.

  Under the condition of no lottery, for example, if "variation pattern distribution table for regular lottery" FH17 to FH20 "shown in FIG. A relatively long “probable mid-low SP reach (variation time 30 seconds)”, “permanent mid-high SP reach (variation time 40 seconds), etc. is selected, and the progress of the game is delayed unnecessarily. Also, under no-lottery situations, a notice effect (for example, a high-reliability effect such as an SP reach) that wins a big hit will only produce the effect by simply giving the player a sense of expectation and a sense of tension. It has little meaning to make it appear.

  In view of such circumstances, the present embodiment relates to the variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. A variation pattern distribution table corresponding to a certain one can be selected. Specifically, if the current gaming state is a definite change state, and the other special figure 2 is 'in the big hit non-winning state (special figure 2 change in the middle)' If there is a 'big hit winning state (special figure 2 big hit change)', a change pattern with a long change time is not selected. A fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH21 to FH24" for no lottery (special figure 1 big hit no lottery) is selected.

  Referring to FIG. 35, the “non-lottery variation pattern allocation tables FH21 to FH24” according to the present embodiment are compared to the “normal lottery random variation pattern allocation tables FH21 to FH24” as follows. It has a feature like. This will be described while focusing on the "no-lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH19 and FH20" and the "no-lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH23 and FH24" selected typically for the losers B and C. Do.

  The “no-lottery variation pattern assignment tables FH23 and FH24” are the same as the features described in the above-mentioned “(22-X: no-lottery variation pattern assignment table features)” (1) The reach variation pattern is not selected, and (2) the selectivity of a short variation pattern (here, a normal variation 1 s) having a relatively short variation time is high. (3) In the case of no lottery, it is not "do not select the reach fluctuation pattern at all" but select the fluctuation pattern of N reach specification but not the fluctuation pattern of SP reach specification. It may be

  In the present embodiment, “a variation pattern distribution table F17, F18 for normal lottery” and “no lottery time”, which are selected for loss A (pending 0 lost A, pending 1 to 3 A), among loss types The variation pattern assignment tables for F21 and FH22 ”have the same configuration as shown in FIG. 35, but the“ normal lottery variation pattern assignment tables F17 and F18 ”also have lost B and C times. As with FH 19 and FH 20 to be selected, a variation pattern may be provided to specify “7 symbols in probability variation” or a reach, and the selectivity can be appropriately determined. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of losses A to C are provided, but one type may be used, and in this case, for example, “F 19” as a fluctuation pattern distribution table for normal lottery may not be drawn. It is sufficient to adopt “FH23” as the hourly fluctuation pattern distribution table. Also in this case, it is possible to exhibit the above-described feature of the fluctuation pattern assignment table for no-lottery and the operation effect by this.

(22-3. Selection of fluctuation pattern in case of setting error)
During the setting error, as described above, "lost" is always determined. Specifically, one of the losses A to C is determined on the special view 1 side, and the loss A is determined on the special figure 2 side. Therefore, in this case, it is a case where the user is forcedly forced to lose, which is the same as the above-mentioned "under no-lottery situation" (see FIGS. 20 and 21). Therefore, when there is a setting abnormality error (when the setting error flag is in the ON state) while the gaming state is a probability change state or a latent state, it is possible to select the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the non-lottery time. .

(Modification of selection pattern of fluctuation pattern at setting error)
Note that a “variation pattern distribution table for setting errors” may be provided which is selected only at the time of setting abnormality errors. In this case, it is possible to provide a variation pattern distribution table (for special view 1 and special view 2) for setting error according to the special symbol type. Here, during the setting abnormal error, since it is forced to be lost, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the setting error, as with the fluctuation pattern distribution table for no drawing time, a notice with a high degree of turning It is preferable to set it as the table structure that the fluctuation pattern which designates production | presentation (high expectation degree advance production etc.) is not selected. Taking this point into consideration, for example, the following configurations can be made.
(T) Do not select at least the reach fluctuation pattern.
(D) Do not select at least the reach fluctuation pattern and the pseudo connected fluctuation pattern.
(N) Do not select at least the variation pattern specified by SP reach. In this case, N reach specified reach variation and normal variation patterns can be selected.
In the case of (G) or (G) described above, it is possible to select a normal fluctuation pattern according to the number of operation holding balls (the number of operation holding balls after subtraction). For example, it is possible to select normal fluctuation 12s when the number of operating balls is one, normal fluctuation 8s when the number of operating balls is two, and normal fluctuation 4s when the number of operating balls is three. . Also, only a specific normal fluctuation pattern can be selected regardless of the number of operation pending balls. However, there is no particular limitation on the specific normal fluctuation pattern, for example, the fluctuation pattern with the longest fluctuation time (10 minutes fluctuation) may be selected, or the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 2s) May be selected, and other normal fluctuation patterns (eg, normal fluctuation 12s) may be selected. In addition, as a specific normal fluctuation pattern, a normal fluctuation pattern dedicated to a setting abnormality error may be provided. In addition, it is preferable to apply the above-mentioned (1)-(3) to any case of loses A-C. In addition, as described above, a “losing D” is selected which is selected only at the time of a setting error, and when the end D is selected, a variation pattern distribution table dedicated to setting errors (a variation pattern distribution for setting errors). A minute table can be selected.

  Further, it is preferable that the fluctuation pattern designation command (hereinafter referred to as “setting abnormality fluctuation pattern designation command”) during the setting abnormality error include information capable of specifying that it is the fluctuation pattern for the setting abnormality error. . By receiving the “set value abnormal command” transmitted in step S 064 of FIG. 27, the effect control unit 24 can grasp that a setting abnormal error has occurred, but this command is exclusively an error notification. It is a command used for Therefore, the effect control unit 24 sets the fluctuation pattern designation command sent this time by including the information for specifying that it is the one selected at the setting abnormality error in the fluctuation pattern specification command for setting abnormality. It is possible to grasp that the variation pattern is selected during the abnormal error, and to execute the effect control according to the decorative symbol variation display game dedicated to the setting error.

For example, it can be configured to execute a decorative symbol variation display game as described in (U) to (Y) below.
(C) While the setting error is in error, the advance notice itself is not shown. For example, as the image display effect, only the background image display (the background image corresponding to the effect mode) and the variation display of the decorative pattern are performed, which are not related to the winning expectation.
(ヰ) Does not display the variation of the decoration pattern. In this case, the variation display operation of the special symbol is being performed, but the decorative symbol remains stopped. The fourth symbol 157 (decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol) and the fourth symbol 159 (decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol) of the dedicated display area 160 may be displayed in a variable manner or may be kept stopped. .
(G) Display of fluctuation exclusively for setting abnormal error (display of fluctuation during RAM error). For example, without starting the normal variation display, "swing variation" to swing the decoration pattern up and down is performed. In this case, the swing fluctuation may be performed with the combination of specific symbols (for example, lost symbols such as “2”, “4”, “0”, etc.).
(G) Perform normal fluctuation display, but when stopped display, stop display with a specific symbol combination (for example, lost symbols such as "2""4""0" etc.) or normal fluctuation After the display is performed, swing fluctuation (temporary stop state) is performed for a predetermined time by a combination of specific symbols.
(Ma) Change from a normal decorative pattern to a dedicated decorative pattern during abnormal setting error. For example, a normal decorative symbol is a symbol displaying numbers 1 to 9, but a decorative symbol dedicated to a setting error is changed to a symbol displaying characters such as "D", "LA" and "-".

<23. Special symbol during processing: Figure 23>
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S304 (corresponding to special figure 1), S309 (corresponding to special figure 2)) in the special symbol management process 1 in FIG. 15 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation processing of FIG.

  In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special figure 1 is a processing target) or 01H (special figure 2 is a processing target) (step S471). If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S471: = 00H), it is then determined whether "special symbol 1 operation timer 1" is zero (step S472). In the special symbol 1 operation timer here, the fluctuation time (residual fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 is set. If the special symbol 1 operation timer is not zero (step S 472: ≠ 0), the variation time of the special figure 1 has not passed yet, that is, the special figure 1 is in variation, so nothing is done without doing anything. In the middle process (here, the special figure 1 is the step S304 to be processed). On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 becomes zero (step S472: = 0), the "special symbol 1 variation in process" shown in FIG. 24 described later is executed (step S473).

  In the determination processing of step S471, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (special figure 2 is a processing target) (step S471: = 01H), then, whether or not "special symbol 2 operation timer 1" is zero or not Is determined (step S474). In the special symbol 2 operation timer here, the variation time (residual variation time) of the special figure 2 is set. If the special symbol 2 operation timer is not zero (step S474: ≠ 0), the variation time of the special figure 2 has not yet passed, that is, the special figure 2 is in variation, so nothing is done without doing anything. The middle process (here, the special figure 2 is the step S309 to be processed) is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 motion timer 1 has become zero (step S474: = 0), the "special symbol 2 changing process" shown in FIG. 25 described later is executed (step S475).

<24. Special symbol 1 during processing: Figure 24>
Next, processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation in FIG. 23 (step S 473) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol 1 during variation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first transmits a decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command "BF01H" (special figure 1 normal fluctuation stop command) to the effect control unit 24 (step S481). Upon receiving this decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command, the effect control unit 24 recognizes that the special symbol variation display game 1 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 1 has passed, and it is currently displaying variation (table variation And the fourth pattern 157 of the dedicated display area 160 is stopped (fixed display). Thereby, with the end of the special symbol variation display game 1, the decorative symbol variation display game 1 is also ended. Although the decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command "BF11H" transmitted in step S498 of FIG. 25 described later is a command having the same function as the above-mentioned decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command "BF01H", The former is a command that works as a "normal fluctuation stop command" that is transmitted when the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 becomes zero, and the latter is the decorative symbol 1 and the fourth symbol 157 being changed at the time of forced loss. Is a command that works as a "special figure 1 forced stop command" for forcibly displaying a stop.

  Then, as a setting process at the time of fluctuation stop of the special figure 1, the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "during confirmation (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status) A time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is set to the OFF state (00H) (step S482). When the special symbol 1 fluctuation flag is set to the OFF state, the stop display is started in the subsequent special symbol display data update process (step S335 in FIG. 16). Therefore, at this stage, it is not the stop display stage of the special symbol (here special figure 1) but the control signal based on the display data in the LED management process (step S098) through the special symbol display data update process. It is output to the special symbol display device to start the stop display, and the stop display is continued until the determined display time elapses.

  Next, the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S483). Here, it is determined whether the special figure 1 has won the small hit, but in the case of the present embodiment, the small hit is excluded from the big hit lottery object of the special figure 1 side, so the determination result of step S483 Is always '≠ 5AH'.

(Special symbol 2 forced loss setting process; steps S485 to S489)
Next, the state of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag is determined (step S485). When the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S 485: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol 1 during the process is exited without doing anything.

  When the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S485: = 5AH), the special symbol stop 1 flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S486).

  Next, the state of the special symbol 2 changing flag is determined (step S487). If the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S487: ≠ 5AH), it is determined that the special figure 2 is not fluctuating, and the special symbol 1 fluctuating process is left without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 changing flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S487: = 5AH), the special symbol 2 forced loss setting process of steps S488 to S489 is performed to forcibly stop the special figure 2 during the change. Do.

  In the special symbol 2 forced loss setting process, first, the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command "BF12H" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S488). The effect control unit 24 that has received the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command recognizes that the special symbol variation display game 2 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 2 has passed, and it is currently in the variation display mode (by table variation) In the case where there is a case where the decorative symbol (decorative symbol 2) corresponding to the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol 159 of the dedicated display area 160 are stopped (fixed display). Thereby, with the end of the special symbol variation display game 2, the decorative symbol variation display game 2 is also ended. Therefore, the "decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command" transmitted here acts as a "special figure 2 forced stop command" for forcibly stopping and displaying the "decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol" being changed.

  Subsequently, various setting processes at the time of special symbol 2 forced loss are performed (step S489). Specifically, the special symbol 2 operation status is switched to "during determination (03H)" (store special character 2 operation status 03H), and the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 (special figure 2 fluctuation time management timer) is cleared to zero. , Set the fixed display time (500ms) in the special symbol 2 movement timer 2, set the special symbol 2 fluctuation flag in the OFF state (store 00H), set the small hit determination flag in the OFF state (store 00H) And set "200 (special stop symbol number corresponding to lost A on the special figure 2 side)" to the special symbol 2 stop symbol number.

  When the process of step S 489 is completed as described above, the special symbol 1 during variation process is ended. Then, the special symbol changing process (step S309) is exited, and the process proceeds to step S306 of the special symbol management process 1 of FIG.

<25. Special symbol 2 during change processing: Figure 25>
Next, processing during special symbol 2 fluctuation in FIG. 23 (step S475) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol 2 in motion process of FIG. In addition, the special symbol 2 in the process of variation (step S475) is basically the same processing content except that the special symbol type of the processing target of the special symbol 1 in process of processing (step S473) is different. . Therefore, in FIG. 25, the description of contents substantially the same as the contents described in FIG. 24 will be appropriately omitted to avoid redundant description.

  In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first transmits a decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command “BF02H” (special figure 2 normal fluctuation stop command) to the effect control unit 24 (step S 491). Receiving the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command, the effect control unit 24 recognizes that the special symbol variation display game 2 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 2 has passed, and the variation display is currently in progress (table variation (table variation) And the fourth pattern 159 of the dedicated display area 160 is stopped (fixed display). Thereby, with the end of the special symbol variation display game 2, the decorative symbol variation display game 2 is also ended. In addition, the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command "BF02H" transmitted in this process has the same function as the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command "BF12 H" transmitted in step S488 of FIG. 24 described above. It is a command, but the former is a command that works as a "normal fluctuation stop command" transmitted when the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 becomes zero, and the latter is the decorative symbol 2 in motion at the time of forced loss. And it is a command which works as a "special figure 2 forced stop command" for making the stop display of 4th pattern 159 forcibly.

  Then, as setting processing at the time of fluctuation stop of the special figure 2, the special symbol 2 operation status is switched to "during confirmation (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol 2 operation status), and the final display on the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 A time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to the OFF state (00H) (step S492).

  Next, the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S493). If the small hit determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S493: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to the determination process of step S495. On the other hand, if the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S493: = 5AH), it is determined that the small hit symbol stops, and the special symbol stop 2 flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S494).

(Special symbol 1 forced loss setting process; steps S495 to S499)
Next, the state of the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is determined (step S495). If the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S495: AH 5AH), the special symbol 2 is not being processed and the process is exited.

  If the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S495: = 5AH), the special symbol stop 1 flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S496).

  Next, the state of the special symbol 1 in motion flag is determined (step S497). If the special symbol 1 in motion flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S497: ≠ 5AH), it is determined that the special figure 1 is not in motion. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 in motion flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S 497: = 5 AH), the special symbol 1 forced loss setting process in steps S 498 to S 499 is performed to forcibly stop the special figure 1 in motion. Do.

  In the special symbol 1 forced loss setting process, first, the decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command "BF11H" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S498).

  Next, the special symbol 1 forced loss setting is performed (step S499). Here, as various setting processing at the time of special symbol 1 forced loss, the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "during determination (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status), special symbol 1 operation timer 1 (special 1 clear the fluctuation time management timer) to zero, set the fixed display time (500 ms) in the special symbol 1 operation timer 2, set the special symbol 1 in motion flag in the OFF state (store 00H), stop the special symbol 1 The symbol number is set to a symbol number for designating a lost type (one of lost A to C) determined in the special stopped symbol creating process (step S 415 in FIG. 18).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbols 1 and 2 are fluctuatingly displayed in parallel, when the fluctuation time of one special symbol is ended first and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuating display Forcibly stop the variation time of the other special symbol in the middle (set the variation time to zero) and perform forced stop control to stop and display the other special symbol with the lost symbol. In addition, when the fluctuation time of one special symbol ends first and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, measurement suspension control is performed to interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol in the fluctuation display. Also, while the measurement is suspended, the fluctuation flag is not set to the OFF state, that is, treated as "during display".

  When one of the special symbols 1 and 2 is to be stopped and displayed first with a big hit symbol and the special symbol in the other change is stopped with the lost symbol, the "forced loss stop control" is performed, it is determined Before the start of the display time, that is, when the variation time of the one special symbol ends (when the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is zero or the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 becomes zero), the other special symbol Control to force stop with a lost design. The reason for controlling in this way is as follows, for example, in the case where the other special symbol is forcibly stopped by the lost symbol during the definite display time (when the definite display time starts to when the definite display elapses), It is because a problem arises.

  For example, when special figure 1 is currently displaying a big hit change, and special figure 2 is changing display in parallel with small hit change, special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and special figure is displayed during 500 ms of the final display period. There may be a case where 2 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol. In this case, not only the overlapping period in which the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are simultaneously stopped is generated, but on the special figure 1 side stopped earlier, the big hit game occurs after the definite display time elapses, and the big hit game is performed. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b that the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, an inappropriate display state occurs. For this reason, processing concerning the forced loss stop is to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation time is over (determination result of step S 472 or S 474 in FIG. 23 is '= 0', special symbol in FIG. 24 to FIG. (1) Processing during fluctuation, special symbol 2 (refer to processing during fluctuation)).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, one special symbol (here, special figure 2) is stopped and displayed first with a small hitting symbol, and measurement of the variation time of the special symbol (here special figure 1) in the other variation When performing measurement suspension control to suspend the time, when the variation time of the special figure 2 ends instead of setting the "special symbol stop 2 flag" to the definite display time lapse (the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 When it becomes zero), "special symbol stop 2 flag" is set (steps S493 to S494), and in the timer management process of Fig. 14, the measurement interruption process for special figure 1 is to be executed (Process route of '= 5 AH' in step S535). The reason for controlling in this way is that if the special symbol stop 2 flag is set during the definite display time start time to the definite display progress time, the following problem occurs.

  For example, when special figure 2 is currently displaying small variation while special figure 1 is displaying variation in parallel with large hitting variation, special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hitting symbol, and the special display period is selected during 500 ms. There may be a case where FIG. 1 is stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol. In this case, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has already passed, the measurement interruption processing for the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 can not be performed at all. Therefore, also in this case, the same problem as the above-described "forced loss stop" case occurs. That is, an overlapping period occurs in which the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are simultaneously stopped and displayed, and on the special figure 2 side stopped earlier, the small hit game occurs after the definite display time elapses, and the small hit game is particularly An inappropriate display state occurs in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b that the big hit symbol in FIG. 1 is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the processing related to the measurement interruption related to the small hit is performed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 ends (the determination result of step S 472 or S 474 in FIG. 23 is '= 0', FIG. 25 The special symbol 2 in the process of step S493 to S494 during the process, see the processing route of '= 5 AH' in step S535 of the timer management process of FIG.

  When performing the above-mentioned "forced loss stop control" or "measurement interruption control", it is not performed during the fixed display time, but at the timing when the variation time of the special symbol is ended (when the variation time is ended) ), To perform the necessary processing. Thereby, an inappropriate display state can be reliably prevented.

  When the processing in step S499 is completed as described above, the special symbol 2 in process of variation is left. Then, the special symbol changing process (step S309) is exited, and the special symbol management process 1 of FIG. 15 is exited.

<26. Processing during special symbol confirmation time: Fig. 26A, Fig. 26B>
Next, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 15 (step S305 (corresponding to special figure 1), S310 (corresponding to special figure 2)) will be described. FIG. 26A to FIG. 26B are flowcharts showing the details of the processing during the special symbol confirmation time.

  In FIG. 26A, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special figure 1 is a processing target) or 01H (special figure 2 is a processing target) (step S501).

  If the special view operation confirmation data is 00H (step S501: = 00H), it is then determined whether the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 is zero (step S502), and the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 is not zero If it is (step S502: ≠ 0), it is determined that the fixed display time has not passed, and the process is ended during the special symbol check time without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 becomes zero (step S 502: 0), the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to “waiting (01H)” on the assumption that the finalized display of the special view 1 is finished ( The special symbol 1 operation status stores "01H" (step S503), and the process proceeds to the determination processing of step S504.

  On the other hand, if the special view operation confirmation data is 01H (step S501: = 01H), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 is zero (step S508), and the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 is If it is not zero (step S508: ≠ 0), it is determined that the fixed display time has not passed, and the process is ended during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 becomes zero (step S508: = 0), it is determined that the finalized display of the special figure 2 ends, and the special symbol 2 operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" ( The special symbol 1 operation status stores "01H" (step S509), and the process proceeds to the determination processing of step S504.

  Hereinafter, in the processing of steps S504 to S521, processing based on the special view operation confirmation data is performed, but basically the same processing content is obtained except that the special symbol type to be processed is different. Therefore, in the following, the case where the processing object is Special Figure 1 (special drawing operation confirmation data is 00H) will be representatively described, and the description of the case where the processing object is Special Figure 2 will be omitted as appropriate.

  When proceeding to step S504, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the big hit determination flag of the current process target side (special symbol 1 big hit determination flag in case of special figure 1, special symbol 2 big hit determination flag in case of special figure 2) The state is determined (step S504). Here, the case where the processing target is the special view 1 (the special view operation confirmation data is 00H) has been described, so the state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is determined.

(When the big hit determination flag is in the ON state: steps S505 to S507)
If it is determined in step S504 that the big hit determination flag is "ON state (5 AH)" (step S504: 5 AH), various setting processing at the time of big hit symbol stop is performed (step S505). Here, a process of designating a gaming state in the big hit game is performed as various setting processing (pre-start process of the big hit game) when the big hit symbol is stopped. Specifically, as shown, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag. Further, the test signal big hit determination flag is set to the ON state (5AH). The test signal big hit judgment flag is a flag used when outputting a type test signal (test shot test signal terminal management processing during performance display monitor processing described later (refer to step S823 in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29) If the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played, and if the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is not in a big hit game. The big hit determination flag is provided with a special symbol 1 big hit determination flag for a test signal corresponding to the special figure 1, and a special symbol 2 big hit determination flag for a test signal corresponding to the special figure 2. Here, the processing target Is the special figure 1, the special symbol 1 big hit judgment flag for test signal is set to ON state (5AH) Also, here the big hit judgment flag and the flags of various functions are OFF state (00H Is set to specify the game state in the jackpot game in the "low probability and electronic without support", also cleared to zero special symbol shorter working hours counter, a special symbol probability variation counter (store 00H).

  Next, 5000 ms is set in the special electric combination device operation timer as the combination gate effective waiting time (step S506). The combination gate effective waiting time is an interval section until the detection of the gaming ball by the combination gate sensor 57a is set to the effective state after the big hit is decided after the definite display time of the special symbol has passed, and the opening is It refers to the time width which defined the production section (big hit start production and right hitting indication production). Therefore, the detection of the combination gate switch 57a is invalidated until the combination gate effective waiting time elapses, and the round game is not started even if the game ball passes the combination gate.

  Next, the role gate operation interval start command (ED01H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S507). The combination gate operation interval start command includes information capable of specifying the present big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, and in the effect control unit 24, the big hit start production or the corresponding to the present big hit type It is used when starting the right-handed instruction effect. When the above processing is finished, the processing is ended during this special symbol confirmation time.

(When the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state: steps S510 to S521)
If it is determined in step S504 that the big hit determination flag is "OFF state (00H)" (step S504:? 5AH), the small hit determination flag is acquired, and the small hit determination on the current process target side The state of a flag (special symbol 1 small hit determination flag in the case of special figure 1 and special symbol 2 small hit determination flag in the case of special figure 2) is determined (step S510). In the case of the present embodiment, since there is no small hit winning on the side of the special figure 1, only the state of the special symbol 2 small hitting determination flag (small hitting determination flag) of the special figure 2 is actually determined.

  If the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S510:? 5AH), the process proceeds to step S512. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S510: = 5 AH), various setting processing at the small hit symbol stop is performed (step S511). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit flag as pre-processing for starting the small hit game when the special symbol indicating the small hit is stopped. . The small hit flag is a flag specifying whether or not the small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that the small hit game is in progress, and the flag is off. If the state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress. Here, the small hit determination flag for test signal is set to the ON state (5AH). The small hit determination flag for test signal is a flag used when outputting a type test signal, similarly to the above-described big hit determination flag for test signal, as described above. (S823), refer to FIG. 29), when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), the small hit game Indicates that it is not inside. When the various setting processes at the time of the above-mentioned small hitting design stop are finished, it advances to the processing of step S512.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (number of remaining special symbol time reduction states) is zero (step S512). If the special symbol time minor counter is zero (step S512: = 0), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S517.

  If the special symbol time short counter is not zero (step S512: ≠ 0), the special symbol time short counter is decremented by 1 as a digest of the current fluctuation number (step S513), and the special symbol time short counter after subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S514).

  If the special symbol time minor counter after subtraction is not zero (step S514: ≠ 0), since the end number of the special symbol minor status has not been reached, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to step S517.

  If the special symbol time shorting counter after subtraction is zero (step S514: = 0), the number of times the special symbol time shorting state ends (in this embodiment, seven times (in the case of time short B) or 50 times (in the case of time short A) It is assumed that the time reduction end has been set (step S515). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the general-purpose symbol release extension state flag, the normal symbol time short state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time short state flag as setting processing at the time reduction end. As a result, from the next game, it will be placed under the "No Power Support State" where the Power Chuo Support is not given.

  When the setting process at the time reduction end of step S515 is finished, the gaming state information transmission process (FIG. 19) is executed (step S516). Since the state command transmitted in the game state information transmission process includes the remaining time reduction number information, the effect control unit 24 ends the time reduction state in the current symbol variation display game, and shifts from the next game to the normal state. If the next game (the first game after the transition to the normal state) is started, the above “result effect” is made to appear, and the above “launch position induction effect (left strike instruction effect) in the second game Effect control processing to make “) appear” (see FIG. 31E (12) (13)).

  Next, in step S517, it is determined whether the special symbol probability variation counter (the number of remaining STs) is zero or not (step S517).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S517: = 0), the processing is ended during the special symbol confirmation time. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S517: ≠ 0), the special symbol probability variation counter is decremented by 1 as the variation count digest of the current special symbol (step S518), and the special symbol after the subtraction It is determined whether the probability variation counter is zero (step S519).

  If the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S519: ≠ 0), since the ST prescribed number has not been reached, the processing is left out during this special symbol confirmation time. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S519: = 0), the variation number of the special symbol has reached the ST prescribed number (in this embodiment, 65535 times), and the setting at the end of the probability variation A process is performed (step S520). Here, as a transition setting process to the normal gaming state along with the completion of the latent state or the definite variation state, the general purpose player open extension state flag, the normal symbol time short state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, the special symbol time short state flag, And 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability variation state flags. As a result, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is placed from the high probability state to the low probability state. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since the ST prescribed number of times is 65535, the latent state or the definite change state is substantially continued until the next big hit.

  When the setting process at the end of the definite variation in step S520 is finished, the gaming state information transmission process (FIG. 19) is executed (step S521), and the process is ended during this special symbol confirmation time.

  By the above, when the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is finished, the special symbol management processing 1 (FIG. 15) of step S093 shown in FIG. 13 is left, and then the special symbol management processing 2 (FIG. 16) of step S094 in FIG. To do).

<28. Performance display monitor process: Figure 28>
Next, the performance display monitor process (step S101) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of the performance display monitor process.

  In the present embodiment, the operation program and storage area of processing relating to performance display are defined in the out-of-area memory (second memory area). Therefore, in FIG. 28, in order to execute processing related to performance display, the CPU 201 first saves the stack pointer related to the in-area RAM (step S821), and executes processing such as setting the stack pointer related to the out-of-area RAM. (Step S822).

  Subsequently, a test process for controlling a test shot signal terminal related to output processing of a test signal to the test shooting apparatus is executed (step S823). Details of the trial shot test signal terminal management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an out-of-area RAM check process is performed to check whether stored data related to performance display in the in-area RAM is damaged or not (step S824). Details of the out-of-area RAM check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30A.

  Next, the outside area LED management process is executed (step S825). In the outside-area LED management process, output control of a control signal (dynamic lighting data) is performed on the performance indicator 99 based on display data created in step S831 described later. In the out-of-area LED management process, the data set in the identification display unit output buffer and the base display unit output buffer set in step S 831 at the previous interrupt is output to the performance indicator 99, and the identification display unit and data display Control display of the department. The identification display unit output buffer and the base display unit output buffer are for storing display pattern data of the identification display unit and the base display unit, and these are provided in the out-of-area RAM. Note that this area outside LED management process may be executed after a display update process (step S831) described later. Further, the output of the control signal to the performance indicator 99 may utilize the LED management process (step S098) of FIG.

(Processing relating to operation confirmation display: processing route from step S826 to S833)
Next, it is determined whether the operation confirmation timer is zero, that is, whether 5000 ms of the operation confirmation time at the time of power on has elapsed (step S826). If the operation confirmation timer is not zero (step S826: ≠ 0), an operation confirmation process for performing an operation confirmation display (all blinks) when the power is turned on is executed (step S833). As already described, the operation confirmation display is set because the operation confirmation timer is set in the operation confirmation timer setting process (step S033 in FIG. 8B), which is a part of the process when the power is turned on. If the power is turned off during the confirmation, the operation confirmation is not restarted from the state at the time of power failure, but the operation confirmation timer is initialized at the time of power recovery, and the operation confirmation time 5000 ms elapses again The operation confirmation display will be performed until it does. Details of the operation confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30B.

(Processing for normal display: processing route from step S826 to S827)
On the other hand, when the operation confirmation timer is zero (step S826: = 0), the normal display process (steps S828 to S831) for displaying the performance information on the performance display 99 is determined as the end of the operation confirmation display. I will go.

  First, 00H is set in the normal state determination flag (step S827). The normal state determination flag is a flag for specifying whether or not it is a “measurement target section” for measuring performance information (base value in the case of the present embodiment). In the case of this embodiment, when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that it is a measurement target section (during normal state), and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), measurement is not performed. Indicates that the target section (game state other than the normal state) is.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state (step S 828), and if it is the normal state (step S 828: YES), the normal state determination flag is set to the ON state (5AH) ( Step S829), thereby designating that the section is a measurement target. However, if it is not the normal state (step S 828: NO), the process proceeds to step S 830 without doing anything, that is, with the normal state determination flag being in the OFF state (00H). Therefore, in this case, the normal state determination flag is maintained in the OFF state, and it is specified that the current gaming state is the measurement non-target section.

  By the way, the non-area RAM is provided with a storage area for managing the same data as the current gaming state information (corresponding to the gaming state number YJ in this embodiment) managed by the intra-area RAM. The game state number YJ can be managed, and when it is determined in step S828 whether or not it is the normal state, the value of the YJ can be acquired and the determination process can be performed. However, in this case, although the same data is managed in the in-area RAM, duplicate identical data is managed in the RAM 203, etc., and the memory outside the area is squeezed and the control load increases. . In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, access to the in-area RAM is not prohibited when executing a process related to the out-of-area memory (such as a process related to performance display). It is preferable to make the memory capacity as much as possible, because the use capacity of the device is strictly limited. In the present embodiment, therefore, the game state number YJ on the in-area RAM side is acquired without providing a storage area for managing the current game state information (the game state number YJ) in the out-of-area RAM. A determination process is performed to determine whether there is any.

  Next, a switch input data setting process is executed (step S828). In the switch input data setting process, the switch input data acquired in step S082, specifically, middle start opening sensor 34a, right start opening sensor 33a, lower right start opening sensor 35a, upper large winning opening sensor 42a, lower large Based on each input data of the winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the OUT monitoring switch 49a, input data regarding the presence or absence of winning for each winning opening is created. The data created here is used to count the normal payout number, the normal out number, the base value, and the total state out number in the performance display monitor tabulation division process (step S022) of FIG.

  Then, the LED display data for displaying the base value obtained in the performance display monitor tabulation division process (step S040) of FIG. 8A on the performance display unit 99 is updated (step S829: display data update process) The output buffer for the identification display unit and the output buffer for the data display unit are set in the LED output buffer. The data created here is output-processed in the area outside LED management process (step S 825) at the next interruption. Thereby, the display of the performance information of the performance indicator 99 is realized.

  Then, the content of the saved register is restored, and the performance display monitoring process is exited. As a result, real time display of performance information (in this embodiment, current base value (real time base value) and previous history information (history base value)) is realized in the performance indicator 99. As described above, the process of FIG. 28 functions as an information display control unit that performs control related to the performance display 99 based on the information display control program. In the present embodiment, a game information storage area capable of storing gaming state data (in the present embodiment, the gaming state number YJ) for specifying the current gaming state is provided in the area RAM of the RAM 202, Outside the area of the RAM 202, a specific information storage area capable of storing specific data indicating a specific gaming state (for example, a normal state) is provided in the second RAM (step S829). The above-mentioned information display control means is based on the gaming state data (gaming state number YJ) stored in the gaming information storage area of the in-area RAM, the gaming state where the current gaming state is specific (in this embodiment, the normal state) A determination means (step S 828) for determining whether or not (YJ = 00H), and a specific information storing area in the specific information storage area when the determination means determines that the game state is the specific one. Information storage means (step S829), calculation means (S040, S830 in FIG. 8B) for calculating specific information (base value) related to the game result based on the specific data, and specific information calculated by the calculation means And display control means (S825 in FIG. 28, S831 in FIG. 28) for controlling display of information on the performance indicator 99.

<29. Test shot terminal control process: Figure 29>
Next, a test process for managing a test shot signal terminal in FIG. 28 (step S822) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the details of the shooting test signal terminal management process.

  The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine in which the testing organization of a third party (designated testing organization based on the provisions of Article 20, Paragraph 5 of the Act on Regulation of Sex Business etc. and Adjustment of Business etc.) is appropriate. In response to a type test for determining whether or not it is possible, a "type test signal" capable of specifying the control state of the gaming machine can be output from the frame external terminal board 21. The game machine provided to perform the type test is provided with a dedicated connection terminal (testing test device information terminal) for connecting to the test device, and input / output of test signal between the game machine and the test device To conduct type tests. In addition, when installing a gaming machine that complies with the type test in the pachinko hall, no change in the adapted control program is permitted, so that the test shot signal terminal management process of step S822 is performed even after installation in the pachinko hall. It will be repeatedly executed for each interrupt, but the above-mentioned dedicated connection terminal is not mounted on the game machine for mass production, and it can not be used as the data counter DT or the external end signal for the hall computer HC It has become. Therefore, the type test signal is different from an outer end signal such as a large hit medium signal or a short time big hit medium signal.

  In this trial shot test signal terminal management process, the 1-byte long external output buffer (corresponding to the trial shot test device information port 1 to 5) provided in the out-of-area RAM is the game information (test information) required for the type test. Acquire and supply the information (for example, flag ON / OFF information) to the 8-bit output port (test fire test equipment information terminal port 1 to 5) and externally output various test information as a type test signal It is supposed to be. In the present embodiment, game information of the following first to fifth information is acquired as test information, and the information can be output from the test shot test device information terminal (test shot test device information terminal port 1 to 5) It has become. The CPU 201 acquires various data stored in the in-area RAM (such as a flag stored according to the processing status of normal game progression), and transmits game information necessary for the type test to the test apparatus. ing.

  In FIG. 29, the CPU 201 first executes a first information acquisition process of acquiring the first information (step S601). This first information is, as shown, a specific error type flag (b0), an ordinary symbol per-piece flag (b1), an ordinary symbol probability fluctuation flag (b2), an ordinary symbol time short status flag (b3), an ordinary motorized role thing It is an operating flag (b4), a general-purpose electric utility extended extension status flag (b5), a normal symbol changing flag (b6), and a special symbol 2 small hit flag (b7) for a test signal. Note that b7 to b0 (the most significant bit b7 to the least significant bit b0) in parentheses indicate bit numbers corresponding to the respective information (the same applies to the second to fifth information described later).

  In the first information acquisition process, first, it is determined whether a specific error has occurred. As a specific error, here, the status of the input port related to the status signal is checked, and if the above-mentioned ball clogging signal, replenishment out signal, counting error signal, door open signal, etc. are generated, the least significant bit b0 is 1 Set to (H). And the normal symbol hit flag (b1), the normal symbol probability fluctuation flag (b2), the normal symbol time short status flag (b3), the normal electric combination symbol in operation flag (b4), the general public valve open extension status flag (b5) , The normal symbol variation flag (b6), and the special symbol 2 small hit flag for test signal (b7) is acquired, the flag value is OFF state (00H) that the corresponding bit is 0 (L), ON state In the case of (5AH), 1 (H) is set to the corresponding bit (the same applies to second information to fifth information described later). For example, specific error not occurring, positive variation state (normal symbol probability fluctuation flag ON, normal symbol time short status flag ON, general-purpose jack release extension status flag ON), during general power release game (normal symbol per flag ON, ordinary electric During game operation flag ON, normal symbol fluctuation in flag OFF (normal symbol is stopped in the support per symbol symbol), and the special situation 2 game status of small hit winning state (special symbol 2 small hit flag for test signal ON) If so, the bit pattern related to the first information is “10111110”. Then, information on the ON / OFF states of various flags related to the first information is output to the test shot information terminal port 1 (step S602). The transmission form for the test apparatus may be serial or parallel (the same applies to steps S603 to S610 described later). Thus, various types of information belonging to the first information are output as a type test signal. Therefore, the type test signal type to be output to the test device corresponding to each bit in the present process is the "gaming machine error status signal (b0) ~ special symbol 2 small" listed in the column of the test shot test device information terminal port 1 shown. It becomes a hit signal (b7).

  Next, second information acquisition processing for acquiring second information is performed (step S603). This second information includes the condition device operation flag (b0), the character continuous operation device operation flag (b1), the special symbol for the test signal one big hit flag (b2), the special symbol probability fluctuation flag (b3), the special symbol time short It is a state flag (b4), a special symbol 1 changing flag (b5), and a special electric symbol 1 operating flag (b6), and the most significant bit b7 is unused. The above-mentioned "special electric combination product 1 operation flag" is a flag used to determine whether or not the special fluctuation winning combination device 42 (the side of the big winning opening 40 for big hit) is in operation, and the flag is When it is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that the special fluctuation winning device 42 is in operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), the upper special fluctuation winning device 42 is inoperative. Indicates that it is medium. In addition, during the period when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) during the round game, that is, the period during which the special variation winning device 42 is in operation, the special winning opening 40 is opened after the special winning opening 40 is opened. It is a period until the remaining ball discharge time (the allowance time for the game ball to be discharged from the big winning opening: 1980 ms) elapses after it is closed, and other than that, it is in the OFF state (= 00H) . In addition to the above "special motorized item 1 operating flag", a "special motorized item 2 operating flag" is provided, and the "special motorized item 2 operating flag" A flag used to determine whether or not the lower prize winning opening 40 side for hit is in operation, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the lower special fluctuation winning device 52 is activated If the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the lower special variation winning device 52 is not operating.

  Then, the ON / OFF states of the various flags related to the second information are output to the trial shot test device information terminal port 2 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S604). As a result, various types of information belonging to the second information are output as a type test signal. The type test signal type in this processing is the condition device operating signal (b0) to the special motorized symbol 1 operating signal (b6) (most significant bit (b7)) listed in the column of the sample injection testing device information terminal port 2 shown. Is not used).

  Next, third information acquisition processing for acquiring third information is performed (step S605). This third information includes normal symbol number (b0 to b2), special symbol 2 big hit flag for test signal (b3), special symbol probability variation flag (b4), special symbol time short status flag (b5), and special symbol 2 variation The middle flag (b6) and the special electric symbol 2 operation flag (b7). The normal symbol number (ordinary stop symbol number) is data for specifying a normal stop symbol form to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a. Here, the lower 3 bits are used to specify the normal stop symbol number.

  Then, the normal stop symbol number according to the third information and the ON / OFF states of the various flags are output to the trial shot test device information terminal port 3 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S606). As a result, various types of information belonging to the third information are output as a type test signal. The type test signal type in this processing is “normally stopped symbol number (b0 to b2) to special motorized symbol 2 in operation signal (b7)” listed in the column of the sample injection testing device information terminal port 3 shown. It should be noted that the special symbol variation flag (special symbol 1 variation flag or special symbol 2 variation flag) is ON during variation display as well as ON while the measurement of the variation time is suspended. (See FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, the output state of the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is maintained while the special figure 1 is in the measurement interruption period, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal output state is maintained during the special figure 2 interruption period. However, in the case of this embodiment, since the small hit is awarded only on the side of the special figure 2, the measurement is interrupted only on the side of the special figure 1. In addition, in the case of a forced loss stop, since the stop display is forcedly performed with the lost symbol, the special symbol changing flag is turned off, and the output of the special symbol 2 changing signal is stopped.

  Next, fourth information acquisition processing for acquiring fourth information is performed (step S607). The fourth information is the special stop symbol number (special symbol 1 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7) of the special view 1. Here, the special stop symbol number of the special figure 2 is designated using 1 byte or less.

  And the information which can specify the special symbol 1 stop symbol number which concerns on the said 4th information is output to the trial shot test apparatus information terminal port 4 of the external terminal board 21 for frames (step S608). As a result, various types of information belonging to the fourth information are output as a type test signal. The type test signal type in this processing is “special symbol 1 data (signal capable of specifying special symbol 1 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7)” listed in the column of the test injection testing device information terminal port 4 in the figure.

  Next, fifth information acquisition processing for acquiring fifth information is performed (step S609). The fifth information is the special stop symbol number (special symbol 2 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7) of the special view 2. Here, the special stop symbol number of the special figure 2 is designated using 1 byte or less.

  And the information which can specify the special symbol 1 stop symbol number which concerns on the said 5th information is output to the trial shot test apparatus information terminal port 5 of the external terminal board 21 for frames (step S610). Thus, various types of information belonging to the fifth information are output as the type test signal. The type test signal type in this processing is “special symbol 2 data (signal capable of specifying special symbol 2 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7)” listed in the column of the test injection testing device information terminal port 5 shown. Then, when the process of step S610 is finished, the process for controlling the test shot signal terminal is ended.

  In addition, it can be decided appropriately how to combine various information of the above-mentioned first information to the fifth information and from which test-injection test apparatus information terminal port to output to the type test apparatus. In addition, the test information is not limited to the first to fifth information, and can be determined as appropriate.

<30A. Out-of-area RAM check processing: FIG. 30A>
Next, the out-of-area RAM check process (step S824) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30A is a flowchart showing the details of the out-of-area RAM check processing according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 30B is a flowchart showing a modification of the out-of-area RAM check processing. This out-of-area RAM check process is a process (common process) executed not only during the performance display monitor process of FIG. 28 but also during the performance display monitor aggregation division process of FIG. 8A (step S040).

  In this out-of-area RAM check process, a check is made as to whether or not the process relating to the performance display is correctly executed (step S841), and a check is made as to whether or not the data in the RAM area related to the performance display is damaged (step S842). If there is an abnormality, data initialization processing for clearing the measurement data is executed (step S 843).

  In FIG. 30, the CPU 201 first determines whether the check data is the normal value (AA 55H) of the initial value (step S831). The check data is data to be monitored in a process of comparing and determining the total number of out-of-states R and the number of out-of-normal times S (out-of-balls confirmation process: not shown) Also in the case where the number of out-of-time units S is large (R <S), “00H” is set as a value indicating that the check data is abnormal, on the assumption that an abnormality has occurred. If the check data is not the normal value (AA 55 H) (step S 831: NO), the process proceeds to step S 843 to execute data initialization processing described later.

  If the check data is a normal value (step S841: YES), it is then determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the count data (step S842). The occurrence of an abnormality in the count data is, for example, when the switch input data indicates an abnormal value, or when the arithmetic processing required to calculate the performance information is not correctly executed. The case where the calculation process is not correctly performed typically includes the case where the calculation process (ball number counting process) on the sensor related to the calculation of the performance information is not correctly performed. The sensors to be counted in the present embodiment are the middle start opening sensor 33a, the right start opening sensor 34a, the lower right start opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the lower large winning opening sensor 52a (upper large winning opening sensor 42a These are six kinds of sensors of the OUT monitoring switch 49a, which are excluded because they are detection sensors for the big hit winning opening 40 for the big hit). Therefore, whether "ball number counting processing" for all these sensors, specifically, winning ball number addition processing (not shown) and out ball number addition processing (not shown) were executed correctly It is determined whether or not.

  The ball number counting process is executed in the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S040) in the main process shown in FIG. 8 as described above. In this ball number counting process, first, winning is performed on five sensors, a middle starting opening sensor 33a, a right starting opening sensor 34a, a lower right starting opening sensor 35a, a general winning opening sensor 43a, and a lower large winning opening sensor 52a. "Sensor detection number counter" which counts the number of times of processing every time the processing is done, performing the processing of adding the number of winning balls, when the presence or absence is checked in order and the winning is confirmed. Is incremented by 1 (sensor detection frequency counter +1). Specifically, when the winning ball number addition process related to the middle starting opening sensor 33a is finished, 1 is added to the sensor detection frequency counter, the value is updated to "01H", and subsequently, the right starting opening sensor 34a is related The value of the sensor detection frequency counter is incremented by one and updated to “02H” when the winning ball number addition processing is finished,..., The sensor detection when the winning ball number addition processing according to the last lower large winning opening sensor 52a is finished The number counter is updated to "05H". Finally, out ball number addition processing for the OUT monitoring switch 49a is performed, and when the out ball number addition processing is completed, the sensor detection number counter is cleared to zero (00H). Therefore, the range of values that can be taken by the sensor detection frequency counter when the above-mentioned ball number counting process (winning ball number adding process, out ball number adding process) is completed is "00H" to "05H", and the ball number counting process When (final out ball number addition processing) is correctly completed, “00H” should be set in the sensor detection number counter. However, if this value becomes a value other than "00H" to "05H" due to some problem, or if it is other than "00H" when starting the winning ball number addition process to the middle starting opening sensor 33a, etc. If it is determined that the count data is not correct (abnormal) (step S842: out of range), data initialization processing is executed (step S843). On the other hand, if the count data is valid (step S 832: within the range), the data initialization process of step S 843 is skipped as it is normal, and the out-of-area RAM check process is exited.

  In the data initialization process of step S 843, “AA 55 H” which is an initial value (normal value) is set as check data, and a RAM area (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.) related to performance display is cleared. Clear the displayed data being displayed. However, only the measurement information storage area may be cleared in the RAM area related to the performance display. The reason is that the data stored in the performance display storage area usually stores the previous base value data (if this is the first measurement, a specific value for the test section is stored (data This data is considered to be saved as the result of previous processing correctly, and the operation confirmation timer may also be cleared. Even if the data initialization process is executed, a new base value is calculated only by displaying an error on the performance indicator 99 and without executing special error processing such as stopping the game or not measuring a new base value. The subsequent processing (steps S824 to S829 in FIG. 28) is advanced.

  When the data initialization process of step S843 is executed, error notification (base value count error notification) may be executed over a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). In this case, the performance indicator 99 can be displayed in a display mode dedicated to errors. In addition, even while an error is being displayed, measurement of a new base value (generally paid out number, normally out number, total state out number counted, calculation of base value) is performed. The error display period may be a predetermined time, or a predetermined gaming period, for example, the number of normal payouts, the number of regular outs, or the total number of outs being a predetermined number (errors canceled: for example, 100). It may be a period until it reaches, or a period until a new normal state arrives (a period until a new measurement target section comes). Of course, new measurement may not be started during the error display period, and new measurement may be started after the end of the error display, or in the same manner as in-area RAM abnormality (backup flag abnormality, setting value data abnormality, etc.) Power on and off may be used as the error resolution condition.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the RAM area related to the performance display is checked in the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S040 in FIG. 8B) and the performance display monitor process (step S101 in FIG. 13). In this case, after initializing the extra-area RAM area (measurement information storage area) storing the measurement data necessary to calculate at least the performance information, the measurement is started from the initial state. Further, the out-of-area RAM area related to the performance display is not the target of the RAM check at the time of power on, that is, the target of the RAM initialization process of step S021 in FIG. 8A and step S028 in FIG. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the contents of the in-area RAM, the data relating to the performance display is not initialized (cleared) together, and only the data relating to the normal game progress is independently initialized. . Therefore, as long as there is no problem in the memory contents of the RAM area related to the performance display, the backup function operates normally, and as long as the gaming machine operates normally, it is permanent even in days or even years. The data can be stored, and it becomes possible to hold performance information and display performance information over a long period of time.

(Modification of out-of-area RAM check processing: FIG. 30A (B))
The out-of-area RAM check process of FIG. 30A (A) can be configured as follows.

  FIG. 30A (B) sets the operation confirmation timer of step S844 to 5000 ms in the process of clearing the operation confirmation timer to zero in the data initialization process of step S843 in the configuration of the out-of-area RAM check processing of FIG. Processing is added. The other processing contents are the same contents as FIG. 30A (A).

  In the configuration of FIG. 30A (B), as shown in the figure, if it is determined that the determination result in step S841 is NO and the determination result in step S842 is out of range due to a defect such as data, the data initialization process in step S843 is checked. The RAM area (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.) related to data and performance display is cleared, the display data currently displayed is cleared, and the operation confirmation timer is cleared. Then, 5000 ms is reset to the operation confirmation timer (step S844). Therefore, in the case of this modification, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the out-of-area RAM, the operation confirmation display is executed again for 5 seconds after the initialization of the RAM. This point is different from the configuration of FIG. 30A (A) in which the operation confirmation display is executed only at the time of power failure recovery. When the operation confirmation timer is not set again in this modification, when the data initialization process is performed, the display is forcibly terminated if the operation confirmation display is being performed. Thereafter, the performance display 99 displays a real time base value and a history base value.

<30 B. Out-of-area RAM check processing: FIG. 30B>
Next, the operation confirmation process (step S833) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30B is a flowchart showing details of the operation confirmation process.

  In FIG. 30B, the CPU 201 first subtracts one from the operation check timer and adds one to the lighting timer (steps S851 and S852).

  Next, it is determined whether the blink switching timing has arrived (step S853). In the present embodiment, the turn-off period and the turn-on period are repeated, for example, in a predetermined cycle of 300 ms during the operation confirmation display. The blink switching timing is managed by the lighting timer. In the present embodiment, the lighting timer is incremented by one every 4 ms of interruption. If the switching timing has a cycle of 300 ms, it can be determined that the blinking switching timing has arrived depending on whether or not the value of the lighting timer is "75". If the blinking switching timing has not come (step S853: NO), nothing is performed, that is, the current on / off state is maintained, and the operation confirmation processing is exited.

  On the other hand, when the blinking switching timing has come (step S853: YES), the lighting timer is cleared (step 854), and the update period counter is updated (step S856). The update cycle counter is used as a counter for determining whether it is lighting or blinking. For example, when the update cycle counter is an 8-bit counter that is circulated by incrementing the range of 0 to 255 (step S856 is applicable), lighting control is performed when the least significant bit of the value of the update cycle counter is '0'. In the case of '1', it is possible to perform blinking control such as turning off control.

  Next, with reference to the update cycle counter, it is determined whether the value is "0" or "1" (step S856). In the case of the present embodiment, at the start of the operation confirmation display, the update period counter is controlled to be zero, and the performance indicator 99 is controlled to be fully lit. Therefore, when the process first passes this process, the value of the update cycle counter is updated to "1" in the process of step S856, so the process proceeds to step S857 (step S856: = 1), and the identification display Turn-off data, ie, "0000H" is set in each of the part output buffer and the base display part output buffer (steps S857 and S858). These unlit data are directly written to each output buffer without referring to the data table or the like. As a result, the lighting period ends and the light-off period occurs.

  On the other hand, when the next blink switching timing arrives (step S853: YES) and the update cycle counter is “0” (step S856: = 0), the process proceeds to step S859, and the output buffer for identification display unit Lighting data, that is, "FFFFH" is set in the base display section output buffer (steps S859 and S860). These lighting data are also directly written to each output buffer without referring to a data table or the like. As a result, the lighting period ends and the light-off period occurs. Thus, the turn-off period ends and the turn-on period occurs. In the present embodiment, when performing operation confirmation display, for example, simply by setting a predetermined data value in each output buffer without referring to the LED data table as shown in FIG. Since there is, it is possible to realize the operation confirmation display (all blinks) by simple processing.

  By the above operation check processing, all blinking (operation check display) of performance indicator 99 repeating all lighting and all turning off is performed for a predetermined time (for 5000 ms), and operation check of performance indicator 99 is possible visually. . If the performance indicator 99 does not display a normal operation confirmation display, for example, if a part of the 7-segment display remains unlit due to disconnection or the like, appropriate measures such as component replacement may be performed.

  The performance display monitor tabulation division process (S040 in FIG. 8B) is also performed during the operation check process, and at least the count process necessary for calculating the base value is performed. As a result, it is possible to accurately reflect on the base value displayed after the operation confirmation display, even for the winning balls and the out balls during the operation confirmation. However, since the base value is not displayed during the operation confirmation display, the calculation of the base value may or may not be performed during 5000 ms during the operation confirmation display. In addition, a judgment process of judging whether or not an abnormality occurs in the performance indicator 99 is provided during the operation confirmation process, and if an abnormality occurs, a dedicated error command (operation confirmation display error command) A process for sending may be provided at 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the operation confirmation display error command, it is possible to notify that the performance display 99 has an abnormality using the effect means. For example, together with the alarm sound, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image such as “an error has occurred in the performance display 99”. Thus, for example, there is no risk of missing a defect such as a decimal point DP hard to confirm visually.

<30 C. Display data update process: FIG. 30C>
Next, the display data update process (step S831) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30C is a flowchart showing details of the display data update process.

  In FIG. 30, the CPU 201 first determines whether the display period of the base value is a test period, a first measurement period (N = 1), or a subsequent measurement period (N ≧ 2), on a real time basis. Identification display section display pattern data is acquired from the identification display section LED data table according to any of a plurality of display sections, such as whether it is a value display section or a history base value display section (step S871). It sets to the output buffer for display parts (step S872). In the present embodiment, two types of base value output periods of a first base value output period for displaying a real time base value and a second base value output period for displaying a history base value are provided, and they are switched every 5000 ms. It has become. In the identification display unit LED data table, as shown in FIG. 38A, display pattern data (upper “01111100B” ('b' displayed) corresponding to the identification display of “bL.” Indicating the real-time base value. Display pattern data (upper "01111100B" ('b) (for 7 segments), lower "10111000B" (for' 7 'segment for' L 'display) and display of identification display section of "b6." Showing history base value The 'display 7 segment' and the lower '11111 101 B' ('6 segment' display 7 segment)) are stored.

  Also, in accordance with the base value at that time (base value during real time measurement), display pattern data for base display unit is acquired from the decimal value LED data table (step S873), and set in the base display unit output buffer. (Step S874). In the decimal numeric LED data table, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), display pattern data of 1 byte length corresponding to ten types of numeric values of 0 to 9 are stored. For example, if the first base value output period for displaying the real time base value and the first base value at that time is "35", the display value of the decimal digit LED data table is displayed as "10" display data "3 “01001111B” corresponding to “1” is acquired, and “01101101B” corresponding to “5” is acquired as the display data of the first place, and is set in the output buffer for the base display unit.

  By the above display update processing, the performance display 99 after all flashing (operation check) is periodically switched and displayed between the real time base value and the previous history base value (for example, every 5000 ms) Display can be realized.

(Specific example of display mode of performance indicator 99 after power on: FIG. 38)
Fig. 38 shows the performance during various time periods during RAM initialization (RAM clear), setting change, RAM abnormality (setting value data abnormality, backup flag abnormality), setting confirmation, backup recovery, etc. It shows a display mode of the display 99. However, FIG. 38 exemplifies a display mode when one of the four 7-segment displays of the performance indicator 99 is made to function as the setting indicator 97.

  In the present embodiment, the in-area RAM initialization process (step S028 in FIG. 8B), the setting change process (step S022 in FIG. 8B, FIG. 11), and the setting confirmation process (step S026 in FIG. 8B) 12) or after completion of the backup recovery process (step S027 in FIG. 8B), the main control unit-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is activated to start the operation confirmation period, and the performance display 99 starts for 5 seconds. After all blinking (confirmation display) is performed, display of the base value is performed (steps S032 to S035 in FIG. 8B, and step S833 in FIG. 28). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, during clear RAM presentation such as “under clear RAM” at clear RAM, during change of settings such as “change in settings” when changing settings (during a setting change operation period) ), “RAM error at the time of RAM abnormality, please turn on the power again and change the setting value”, etc. The effect is on before the start of the operation check period (during the power on wait period). Therefore, the display of the performance indicator 99 is all off or not displayed. However, during the setting confirmation effect (during the setting confirmation period) and during the setting change effect (during the setting change operation period), one of the four 7-segment LEDs of the performance indicator 99 functions as the setting indicator 97. In order to do this, the set value information is displayed (see the column of "set value display" shown). If the RAM is abnormal, it is put in the power reactivation wait state (step S019 in FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 (B)), and the game operation is stopped until the power is reactivated. All remain off (not shown) (refer to the column of the power on display in the figure).

  In addition, in any case during RAM clearing, setting change, setting confirmation and backup restoration, during the wait for customer waiting effect (while waiting for customer wait demo screen) after each processing, 5 seconds pertaining to the operation check display When all the flashings of have ended, display of the base value is then started. In addition, at the time of setting change, since all flashing for 5 seconds starts at the end of setting change operation, when setting change completion effects such as "setting has been changed" continue for 5 seconds or more, the setting change While the effect is complete, the entire blinking for 5 seconds is over, and the display of the base value is started. Therefore, in this case, an overlapping display period of the setting change completion effect and the base value display occurs. If other effects such as, for example, “Recovery completed display etc.” (not shown) displaying “Resume from power failure restart your game” at the time of backup recovery is also restored if it lasts for 5 seconds or more While the effect is complete, the entire blinking for 5 seconds is over, and the display of the base value is started.

  Note that the RAM error notification related to clearing the RAM is executed with the highest priority over other notification effects, and even when the effect control command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 during the execution of the RAM error notification, the RAM error notification As long as is not finished (after 30 seconds of the RAM clear notification timer), other effects are not executed. If the RAM clear notification timer (see step S 030 in FIG. 8B) has not elapsed, the process is not further progressed, and all of the RAM error notifications remain unlit (not displayed). However, if the RAM clear notification timer is configured to simply count the RAM error notification time and proceed with the subsequent processing, all blinks for 5 seconds from the start of the RAM error notification and then the display of the base value is started. become.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine using the gaming ball as the gaming medium has been described in each of the embodiments described above, it is not particularly limited as long as the gaming machine can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a game machine using game medals as a game medium, a game machine using game media using electromagnetic recording (a game machine such as a so-called "enclosed game machine (managed game machine)"), a rotating drum It may be an expression game machine or the like. In addition, as long as the purpose of the present invention is achieved and the operation effect is exhibited, it is not limited to the simultaneous variation type, but naturally also to a game machine of a type not varying the other special symbol when one special symbol is in a variable display. It can apply.

  The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 gaming machine,
2 front frame,
3 game boards,
3a playing area,
4 Outer frame,
6 glass doors,
9 saucer,
15 firing operation handle,
19 game ball payout device,
20 main control unit (main control board),
24 Effect control unit (effect control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
32 launchers,
34, 34a upper starting opening, upper starting opening sensor 35, 35a lower starting opening, lower starting opening sensor,
36 Liquid Crystal Display,
37, 37a Normal symbol opening, Normal symbol opening,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Normal symbol display device,
50, 52a big prize mouth, big prize mouth sensor 41 normal fluctuation prize device,
41c Normal electric role solenoid,
52 special fluctuation winning equipment,
52c big winning opening solenoid,
43 general winning openings,
43a General winning opening sensor,
45 decorative lamps,
46 speakers,
47 Movable Wings,
49 out,
60 full detection sensor,
61 front door opening sensor,
94 Setting Key Switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 setting change complete switch,
97 setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
99 performance indicator,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 production control CPU,
242 production control ROM,
243 Effect control RAM.

Claims (1)

A RAM including a first RAM area capable of storing game data used in game processing relating to game progression, and a second RAM area capable of storing information display data used in information display processing not directly related to the game progress;
A ROM including a first ROM area storing a game control program for executing the game process, and a second ROM area storing an information display control program for executing the information display process;
Game control means configured to have a CPU that executes a game control operation based on the game control program and the information display control program;
Providing information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game result;
A gaming machine capable of controlling execution of a plurality of types of gaming states,
The game control means
Gaming state control means capable of controlling any of the plurality of types of gaming states based on the gaming control program;
Information display control means for performing control relating to the information display means based on the information display control program;
While the first RAM area is provided with a game information storage area capable of storing game state data for specifying a current game state as the game data,
The second RAM area is provided with a specific information storage area capable of storing specific data indicating that it is a specific gaming state,
The information display control means
Determining means for determining whether or not the current gaming state is a specific gaming state based on the gaming state data stored in the gaming information storage area;
Specific information storage means for storing the specific data in the specific information storage area when it is determined by the determination means that the game condition is the specific one;
Calculating means for calculating specific information on the game result based on the specific data;
And display control means for performing display control of the information to be displayed on the information display means based on the specific information calculated by the calculation means.
A game machine characterized by